PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Subwoofer

SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Subwoofer PIONEER - Free user manual and instructions

Find the device manual for free SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) PIONEER in PDF.

📄 156 pages English EN Download 💬 AI Question 10 questions ⚙️ Specs
Notice PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - page 5
View the manual : Français FR English EN
Pick your language and provide your email: we'll send you a specifically translated version.
Product Type Multi-channel audio amplifier-tuner / active subwoofer
Brand Pioneer
Model SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX)
Dimensions (W x H x D) 200 mm x 375 mm x 437 mm
Weight 9.0 kg
Power Supply 220-240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Standby Power Consumption 0.3 W
Output Power (RMS) 100 W per channel (front, center, surround) and 100 W for subwoofer (1 kHz, 10% THD, 4 Ω)
Subwoofer Frequency Response 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz
Nominal Speaker Impedance 4 Ω
FM Tuner Section 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz, 75 Ω unbalanced antenna
AM Tuner Section 531 kHz to 1602 kHz, loop antenna
Main Features 5.1 multi-channel amplifier, built-in subwoofer, FM/AM tuner, MCACC automatic calibration, surround modes (Dolby Pro Logic II, DTS, Advanced Surround), Sound Retriever, acoustic equalizer, tone control, sleep timer
Audio Inputs 1 digital coaxial input, 2 digital optical inputs, 1 stereo analog input (RCA)
Speaker Outputs 5 terminals for front, center and surround speakers, 1 terminal for subwoofer
Supplied Accessories Remote control, display unit, coaxial cable, control cable, display cable, AM loop antenna, FM wire antenna, MCACC microphone, power cord, user manual, warranty card
Maintenance and Cleaning Unplug the device before cleaning. Wipe with a soft, dry cloth. Do not use solvents or abrasive products.
Safety Do not expose to moisture. Ensure adequate ventilation (5 cm above, rear and sides). Unplug during thunderstorms or prolonged non-use. Do not open the casing: contains live parts.
Spare Parts and Repairability Spare parts are available from Pioneer authorized service centers. Repair must be carried out by a qualified professional.
General Information Part of a 5.1 home theater system compatible with Pioneer DVD recorders (DVR-545HX-S). Allows playback of audio and video sources with surround sound.

Frequently Asked Questions - SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) PIONEER

How to connect the subwoofer to the system?
Connect the subwoofer cable to the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER terminal on the rear of the receiver. Ensure the power cord is unplugged during connection. Use only the supplied speaker.
How to use the MCACC automatic calibration?
Connect the supplied microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the rear. Place the microphone at ear level at your listening position. Press MCACC on the remote. The system emits a series of test tones. Remain quiet during the process. Once finished, acoustic equalization is activated.
What to do if the remote control does not work?
Check the batteries (type AA/R6). Ensure there are no obstacles between the remote and the infrared sensor of the display unit. Replace batteries if necessary. If connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable, point the remote at the display.
How to listen to the radio?
Press FM/AM to select the tuner. Use TUNE +/— to tune. For automatic search, press and hold until the frequency scrolls. You can memorize up to 30 stations by pressing SETUP then ST.MEM..
How to reset the system to factory settings?
Turn on the system. Press and hold the SURROUND button on the display unit, then press STANDBY/ON. All settings will be reset at the next power-on.
No sound from surround or center speakers?
Check the channel levels in the SETUP > CH LEVEL menu. Ensure you are not in STEREO or VIRTUAL mode. Verify the speaker connections. If the source is a DVD, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital.
How to clean the device?
Always unplug the power cord before cleaning. Use a soft, dry cloth. Never use benzene, thinner or other chemicals. Avoid vinyl disc cleaners.
Can I use speakers other than those supplied?
No, use only the supplied speakers (model S-ST606). Connecting other speakers may cause malfunction or fire. The nominal impedance is 4 ohms.
How to mount the center speaker on the wall?
The center speaker has a mounting hole. Use screws appropriate for the wall material (not supplied). Ensure the wall is strong enough to support the weight. Do not mount on plywood or soft surfaces. Pioneer disclaims any responsibility for improper installation.
How to adjust bass and treble?
Press SOUND on the remote. Use the arrows to select TONE then BASS/TRE. Adjust BASS or TREBLE with the up/down arrows and confirm with ENTER.

User questions about SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) PIONEER

0 question about this device. Answer the ones you know or ask your own.

Ask a new question about this device

The email remains private: it is only used to notify you if someone responds to your question.

No questions yet. Be the first to ask one.

Download the instructions for your Subwoofer in PDF format for free! Find your manual SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - PIONEER and take your electronic device back in hand. On this page are published all the documents necessary for the use of your device. SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) by PIONEER.

USER MANUAL SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) PIONEER

Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer

Speaker System

DVD Recorder

Discover the benefits of registering your product online at www.pioneer.co.uk (www.pioneer-eur.com)

Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.

Please read through these operating instructions so that you will know how to operate your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, put them in a safe place for future reference.

IMPORTANT

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - IMPORTANT - 1

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated "dangerous voltage" within the product's enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO PREVENT THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS. INSIDE.REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - CAUTION: - 1

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

D3-4-2-1_En-A

WARNING

This equipment is not waterproof. To prevent a fire or shock hazard, do not place any container filed with liquid near this equipment (such as a vase or flower pot) or expose it to dripping, splashing, rain or moisture. D3-4-2-1-3_A.En

Operating Environment

Operating environment temperature and humidity: +5^ to +35^ (+41^ to +95^) ; less than 85% RH

(cooling vents not blocked)

Do not install this unit in a poorly ventilated area, or in locations exposed to high humidity or direct sunlight (or strong artificial light) D3-4-2-1c_A.En

This product complies with the Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC, amended by 93/68/EEC), EMC Directives (89/336/EEC, amended by 92/31/EEC and 93/68/EEC). D3-4-2-1-9a_En

WARNING

Before plugging in for the first time, read the following section carefully.

The voltage of the available power supply differs according to country or region. Be sure that the power supply voltage of the area where this unit will be used meets the required voltage (e.g., 230V or 120V) written on the rear panel. D3-4-2-1-4_A_En

WARNING

To prevent a fire hazard, do not place any naked flame sources (such as a lighted candle) on the equipment. D3-4-2-1-7a_A_En

CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser product, but this product contains a laser diode higher than Class 1. To ensure continued safety, do not remove any covers or attempt to gain access to the inside of the product. Refer all servicing to qualified personnel. The following caution label appears on your unit. Location: top and rear of the unit

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

CAUTION

CLASS 3B VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN,AVOID EXPOSURE TO THE BEAM.

VRW2262-A

ATTENTION RADIATIONS LASER VISIBLES ET INVISIBLES DE CLASSE 3B QUAND OUVERT. EVITEZ TOUT EXPOSITION AU RAISCEAU.

ADVARSEL KLASSE 38 SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRALING VED ABNING. UNDG A UDSETTALSE FOR STRALING.

VARNING KCLASS 38 SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRALNING NAR DENNA DEL AR ÖPPNAD. UNDVIK ATT UTSÄTTA DIG FÜR STRÄLEN.

VORSICHBEI GEÖFFENTRER ABOECKUNG IST SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHUNG DER KLASSE 38 IM GERATENNEREN VORHANDEN. NICH DMIT LASERSTRAH. UASSETZEN

PRECAUCION CUANDO SE ABRE HAY RADIACION LASER DE CLASE 3B VISIBLE E INVISIBLE. EVITE LA EXPOSICION A LOS RAYOS LASER.

VARO! AVATTAESSA OLET ALTIINA NAKYVALLE JA NAKYMATTOMALLE LUOKAN 3B LASERSATEILLYL. ALA KATSO SATEESEEN.

If the AC plug of this unit does not match the AC outlet you want to use, the plug must be removed and appropriate one fitted. Replacement and mounting of an AC plug on the power supply cord of this unit should be performed only by qualified service personnel. If connected to an AC outlet, the cut-off plug can cause severe electrical shock. Make sure it is properly disposed of after removal. The equipment should be disconnected by removing the mains plug from the wall socket when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation). D3-4-2-2-1a_A_En

CAUTION

The STANDBY/ON switch on this unit will not completely shut off all power from the AC outlet. Since the power cord serves as the main disconnect device for the unit, you will need to unplug it from the AC outlet to shut down all power. Therefore, make sure the unit has been installed so that the power cord can be easily unplugged from the AC outlet in case of an accident. To avoid fire hazard, the power cord should also be unplugged from the AC outlet when left unused for a long period of time (for example, when on vacation).

POWER-CORD CAUTION

Handle the power cord by the plug. Do not pull out the plug by tugging the cord and never touch the power cord when your hands are wet as this could cause a short circuit or electric shock. Do not place the unit, a piece of furniture, etc., on the power cord, or pinch the cord. Never make a knot in the cord or tie it with other cords. The power cords should be routed such that they are not likely to be stepped on. A damaged power cord can cause a fire or give you an electrical shock. Check the power cord once in a while. When you find it damaged, ask your nearest PIONEER authorized service center or your dealer for a replacement. S002 En

VENTILATION CAUTION (Receiver subwoofer) When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 5cm at top, 5cm at rear, and 5 cm at each side).

VENTILATION CAUTION (DVD Recorder) When installing this unit, make sure to leave space around the unit for ventilation to improve heat radiation (at least 10cm at top, 10cm at rear, and 10cm at each side).

WARNING

Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation to ensure reliable operation of the product, and to protect it from overheating. To prevent fire hazard, the openings should never be blocked or covered with items (such as newspapers, table-cloths, curtains) or by operating the equipment on thick carpet or a bed. D3-4-2-1-7b_A_En

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - WARNING - 1
Receiver subwoofer

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - WARNING - 2
DVD Recorder

This product is for general household purposes. Any failure due to use for other than household purposes (such as long-term use for business purposes in a restaurant or use in a car or ship) and which requires repair will be charged for even during the warranty period.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - WARNING - 3

If you want to dispose this product, do not mix it with general household waste. There is a separate collection system for used electronic products in accordance with legislation that requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling.

Private households in the 25 member states of the EU, in Switzerland and Norway may return their used electronic products free of charge to designated collection facilities or to a retailer (if you purchase a similar new one).

For countries not mentioned above, please contact your local authorities for the correct method of disposal.

By doing so you will ensure that your disposed product undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery and recycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on the environment and human health.

Chapter 1

Contents

Section One

01 Contents. 4
What's in the box. 4
02 Speaker Setup Guide 5
Safety precautions when setting up. 5
Home theater sound setup 5
Wall mounting the center speaker. 7
Before mounting 7
Additional notes on speaker placement 7
03 Connecting up 8
Basic connections 8
Using this system for TV audio. 11
04 Remote control. 12
Using the remote control. 14
Putting the batteries in the remote control 15
05 Before you start 16
Switching on 16

Setting up. 16
Basic operation 17

Watching a DVD 17
Listening to a CD. 17
Watching a title recorded on the HDD 17
Listening to the radio 17

Section Two

Operating instructions for the Audio

Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer and

Speaker System 18

Section Three

Operating instructions for the DVD

Recorder 38

What's in the box

Please confirm that the following items are all supplied.

Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW505HX) box:

Remote control (page 12)
AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) x2 (page 15)
- Display unit (page 20)
Power cord (page 10)
- AM loop antenna (page 8)
FM wire antenna (page 8)
Control cable (page 8)
- Display cable (page 8)
Coaxial cable (page 8)
- Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) (page 21)
These operating instructions
Warranty card

DVD recorder (DVR-545HX-S) box:

Remote control
AA/R6 dry cell batteries x2
Audio / video cable (red/white/yellow) (page 11)
G-LINKTM cable (page 49)
RF antenna cable x2 (1.5 m and 30 cm) (page 11)
Power cord (page 11)
- Operating instructions
Warranty card

Speakers (S-ST606) box:

  • Speakers (front x2, surround x2, center x1) (page 10)
  • Speaker cables x5 (page 9)
    Non-skid pads (large) x4 (page 5)
    Non-skid pads (large) x16 (page 5)
    Non-skid pads (small) × 4 (page 5)
  • Speaker stand bases x4 (page 5)
  • Screws (for bases) x12 (page 5)

Chapter 2

Speaker Setup Guide

Safety precautions when setting up

When assembling the speakers, lay them down flat on their side to avoid accidents or injury. Make sure to use a stable surface when assembling, setting up, and placing the speakers.

Home theater sound setup

  • This is a standard multichannel surround sound speaker setup for optimal 5.1 channel home theater sound.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Home theater sound setup - 1

1 Attach the speaker stand bases to the stems using the screws provided.

Once you have aligned the stem and base, secure with the small screws at the points shown below. Note that the speaker should face in the direction of the base of the isosceles triangle (outlined below).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Attach the speaker stand bases to the stems using the screws provided. - 1

2 Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown).

Use the adhesive side of the pads to attach them to the base (flat surface) of each speaker.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown). - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown). - 2
(large) x 16
Front and Surround speakers

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown). - 3
Non-skid pads
(large) x 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown). - 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Attach the smaller non-skid pads to the base of the center speaker. The large non-skid pads are for the front and surround speakers, and the receiver subwoofer (as shown). - 5
Receiver subwoofer

3 Secure each of the front and surround speakers using the metal catch provided.

Screw two picture hooks or similar into the wall behind the speaker. Pass a chain or cord around the hooks and through the metal catch so that the speaker is stabilized (make sure to test that it supports the weight of the speaker).

After installing, make sure the speaker is securely fixed.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Secure each of the front and surround speakers using the metal catch provided. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Secure each of the front and surround speakers using the metal catch provided. - 2

Caution

  • The metal catch is not a mounting fixture, and the speaker should not be hung directly from the wall using this catch. Always use a chain or cord when stabilizing the speaker.
  • Pioneer disclaims all responsibility for any losses or damage resulting from improper assembly, installation, insufficient strength of the installation materials, misuse, or natural disasters.

4 Connect the speaker system.

Refer to Connecting up to connect the speakers properly. After connecting everything, place the speakers as shown in the diagram above for optimal surround sound.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connect the speaker system. - 1

After placing the speakers, run the Auto MCACC setup (page 21) to complete your surround sound setup.

Wall mounting the center speaker

The center speaker has a mounting hole which can be used to mount the speaker on the wall.

Before mounting

  • Remember that the speaker system is heavy and that its weight could cause the screws to work loose, or the wall material to fail to support it, resulting in the speaker falling. Make sure that the wall you intend to mount the speakers on is strong enough to support them. Do not mount on plywood or soft surface walls.
  • Mounting screws are not supplied. Use screws suitable for the wall material and support the weight of the speaker.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Before mounting - 1

Caution

If you are unsure of the qualities and strength of the wall, consult a professional for advice.
- Pioneer is not responsible for any accidents or damage that result from improper installation

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Caution - 1

Additional notes on speaker placement

  • Install the main front left and right speakers at an equal distance from the TV.
  • Install the center speaker above or below the TV so that the sound of the center channel is localized at the TV screen.

Precautions:

  • When installing the center speaker on top of the TV, be sure to secure it with tape or some other suitable means. Otherwise, the speaker may fall from the TV due to external shocks such as earthquakes, endangering those nearby or damaging the speaker.
  • The front (L/R), center and surround (L/R) speakers supplied with this system are magnetically shielded. However, depending on the installation location, color distortion may occur if the speaker is installed extremely close to the screen of a television set. If this happens, turn the power switch of the television set OFF, and turn it ON after 15 min to 30 min. If the problem persists, place the speaker system away from the television set.
  • The receiver subwoofer is not magnetically shielded and so should not be placed near a TV or monitor. Magnetic storage media (such as floppy discs and tape or video cassettes) should also not be kept close to the receiver subwoofer.
  • Do not attach the front, surround speakers and receiver subwoofer to the wall or ceiling. They may fall off and cause injury.
  • For safety, make sure that there is no exposed bare speaker wire outside of the speaker terminals.
  • Do not connect the supplied speakers with any other amplifier. This may result in malfunction or fire.
  • Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system.

Chapter 3

Connecting up

Basic connections

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Basic connections - 1

Important

  • When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket.

After completing all connections, connect the power cords to the wall socket.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1
Receiver subwoofer (SX-SW505HX)

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 2

Note

  • When using the display unit in a wall-mounted location, take full precautions to prevent the unit from accidentally falling.
  • Screws and other fixtures for use in wall mounting are not included.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Note - 1

WARNING

  • Pioneer bears no responsibility for accidents resulting from faulty assembly or installation, insufficient mounting strength of walls, mounting fixtures (or other building fixtures), misuse or natural disasters.

1 Connect the DVD recorder to the receiver subwoofer.

a. Plug the control cable into the CONTROL OUT jack on the rear of the receiver subwoofer.

Plug the other end of the cable into the CONTROL IN jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.

b. Plug the coaxial cable into the DIGITAL AUDIO

INPUT (DVD/DVR 1) jack on the rear of the receiver subwoofer.

Plug the other end of the cable into the COAXIAL

DIGITAL OUT jack on the rear of the DVD recorder.

Note that unless the control cable is connected, you can't use the remote control with the DVD recorder.

2 Connect the display unit to the receiver subwoofer.

Plug the L-shaped end of the display cable into the connector on the rear of the display unit, then plug the other end of the display cable into SYSTEM CONNECTOR jack on the receiver subwoofer.

3 Assemble the AM loop antenna.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Assemble the AM loop antenna. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Assemble the AM loop antenna. - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Assemble the AM loop antenna. - 3

a. Bend the stand in the direction indicated by the arrow.
b. Clip the loop onto the stand.
c. If you want to fix to a wall or other surface, perform step b after first securing the stand with screws.

It is recommended that you determine the reception strength before securing the stand with the screws.

4 Connect the AM and FM antennas1.

a. Connect one wire of the AM loop antenna to each AM antenna terminal2.

For each terminal, press down on the tab to open; insert the wire, then release to secure.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connect the AM and FM antennas1. - 1

b. Push the FM antenna3 plug onto the center pin of the FM antenna socket.

5 Connect each speaker.

Each speaker cable has a color-coded connector at one end and two wires at the other end.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connect each speaker. - 1

  • Twist and pull off the protective shields on each wire.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connect each speaker. - 2

  • Connect the wires to the speaker. Match the colored wired with the color-coded label (model label), then insert the colored wire into the red (+) side and the other wire into the black (-) side.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connect each speaker. - 3

Note

1 - Keep antenna cables away from other cables, the display unit, receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder.
If rection with the supplied antenna is poor, see Improving poor FM reception and Improving poor AM sound on page 26 or Connecting external antennas on page 30.
2 - Don't let it come into contact with metal objects and avoid placing near computers, television sets or other electrical appliances.
The signal earth () is designed to reduce noise that occurs when an antenna is connected. It is not an electrical safety earth.
If radio reception is poor, you may be able improve it by re-inserting each antenna wire into the opposite terminal.
- For best reception, do not untwist the AM loop antenna wires or wrap them around the loop antenna.
3 To ensure optimum reception, make sure the FM antenna is fully extended and not coiled or hanging at the rear of the unit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Note - 1

  • Connect the other end to the color-coded speaker terminals on the rear of the receiver subwoofer. Make sure to insert completely.

The small lug at the wire-end of the speaker plug should face up or down depending on whether it's being plugged into one of the upper or lower speaker terminals. Please make sure to connect correctly.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Note - 2
Upper terminal

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Note - 3
Lower terminal

6 Connect the subwoofer cable.

  • Just below the subwoofer speaker, to the left of center, you should see the subwoofer connecting cable. Plug this into the SUBWOOFER SPEAKER terminal.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connect the subwoofer cable. - 1

Caution

  • These speaker terminals carry HAZARDOUS LIVE voltage. To prevent the risk of electric shock when connecting or disconnecting the speaker cables, disconnect the power cord before touching any uninsulated parts.
  • Do not connect any speakers other than those supplied to this system.
  • Do not connect the supplied speakers to any amplifier other than the one supplied with this system. Connection to any other amplifier may result in malfunction or fire.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Caution - 1

7 Connect the DVD recorder to your TV.1

  • Connect the VIDEO OUTPUT jack to a video input on your TV.
    Use the yellow jack of the supplied audio/video cable for the video connection.
  • Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV.

Use the red and white jacks of the supplied audio/video cable for the audio connection. Make sure you match the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.

  • See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 to connect the antenna.

8 Connect the power cord.2

  • Connect the power cords to AC inlets on the receiver subwoofer and DVD recorder. Connect the power cords to a wall socket.

Using this system for TV audio

If your TV has a stereo audio output you can connect it to this system and enjoy surround TV sound.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using this system for TV audio - 1

1 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks on your TV to the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks on the receiver subwoofer.

Use the red/white stereo audio cable (not supplied) for this connection. Make sure you match the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.

  • You can use the ANALOG AUDIO INPUT jacks for any analog source you want, such as a tape deck, etc.

Note

1 Other types of video connection are possible. See page 48 to page 50 for more on this.
2. Do not use any power cord other than the one supplied with this system.
- Do not use the supplied power cord for any purpose other than connecting to this system.

Chapter 4

Remote control

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Remote control - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Remote control - 2

Important

  • Functions printed in green on the remote control are accessed by switching the MAIN/SUB switch to SUB.

1 RECORDER

Press to switch the recorder on or into standby.

2 RECEIVER

Press to switch the receiver subwoofer on or into standby.

3 Input select buttons

HDD/DVD (page 82)

Press to select the hard disk (HDD) or DVD for recording or playback. The receiver subwoofer's audio input is also switched to DVD/DVR1.

FM/AM (page 26)

Press to select the built-in radio tuner.

AUDIO IN (page 30)

Press repeatedly to select one of the receiver subwoofer's audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG).

4 SOUND RETRIEVER

Press to restore CD quality sound to compressed audio sources (page 24).

5Playback controls (page 88)

II PAUSE

Press to pause playback or recording.

▶ PLAY

Press to start playback.

STOP

Press to stop playback.

6 Recording controls (page 82)

REC

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in blocks of 30 mins.

When the red action button is visible in a GUIDE Plus+ ^TM screen, use for One-Button-Record.

STOPREC

Press to stop recording.

7 INFO

While watching D.TV, press to display the information banner.

Press to see additional information for the highlighted item in the EPG.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - INFO - 1

Note

1 If the recorder is set to remote mode 2 or 3, the receiver subwoofer's audio input will not be switched. See also Remote Control Mode on page 138.

8 HELP

Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.

9 DISC NAVIGATOR (page 91, 101)/TOP MENU (page 89) Press to display the Disc Navigator screen, or the top menu if a DVD-Video or finalized DVD-R/RW (Video) disc is loaded.

10 GUIDE

Press to display the EPG screen; press again to exit.

11 HOME MENU

Press to display the Home Menu, from which you can navigate many functions of the system.

12 / / / (cursor buttons) and ENTER

Use to navigate all DVD recorder on-screen displays. Press ENTER to select the currently highlighted option.

While watching D.TV press ENTER to display the Channel List screen.

CM BACK (commercial back)

Press repeatedly to skip progressively backward through the audio or video playing.

CM SKIP (commercial skip)

Press repeatedly to skip progressively forward through the audio or video playing.

13 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 83)

Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.

14 RETURN/EXIT

Press to go back one level in the on-screen menu or display.

Also press to exit the MHEG application.

15 PREV/NEXT

Press to skip to the previous or next title/chapter/ track/folder; or to display the previous or next menu page.

When GUIDE Plus ^+ is displayed, use to display the previous/next page.

CHANNEL + / - (page 80)

Press to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.

16 VOLUME + / -

Use to adjust the volume.

17 Colour buttons

(RED, GREEN, YELLOW, BLUE)

Use when an EPG screen is displayed or when tuned to a data channel of a digital broadcast. The function of each button will be described on-screen, and changes depending on the screen being displayed.

AUDIO (page 81, 96)

Press to change the audio language or channel. (When the recorder is stopped, press to change the tuner audio.)

SUBTITLE (page 95)

Press to display/change the subtitles included in multilingual DVD-Video discs.

ANGLE (page 96)

Press to switch camera angles on discs with multi-angle scenes.

PLAY MODE (page 93)

Press to change the play mode (search, repeat, program play, etc.).

18 TIMER REC (page 63)

Press to set a timer recording from the GUIDE Plus+TM system.

19 / (page 93)

Press to start reverse or forward scanning. Press again to change the speed.

11/1,11/11 (page 93)

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed.

While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction.

When GUIDE Plus ^+ is displayed, use to display the previous/next day.

20 REC MODE (page 82)

Press repeatedly to change the recording mode (picture quality).

21 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.

22 Number buttons

Use the number buttons for track/chapter/title selection; channel selection, and so on.

/ / / (cursor buttons) and ENTER

Use to control receiver functions.

SETUP

Use to access the menu system for surround sound setup, tuner settings and so on (page 21, 26, 27, 28, 33).

SR+

Use to setup the SR+ features and to select the SR+ mode (page 32).

MCACC

Starts the Auto MCACC setup (page 21).

TEST TONE

Use to output the test tone (for speaker setup) (page 29).

SURROUND

Use to select a Surround mode (page 23).

SLEEP

Press to set the sleep timer (page 33).

ADVANCED

Use to select a Pioneer original surround mode (page 24).

SOUND (page 25)

Press to access the sound menu, from which you can adjust bass and treble, etc.

CLEAR

Press to clear an entry and start again.

23 MENU (page 89)

Press to display the disc menu if a DVD-Video, finalized DVD-R/RW or finalized DVD + R / + RW disc is loaded.

When in the GUIDE Plus ^+ system, use to jump directly to the Menu bar.

24VIDEO IN (page 85)

Press to change the DVD recorder input for recording and playback.

25 TV/DVD

Press to switch between 'TV mode', in which you get the picture and sound from the TV's tuner, and 'DVD mode', in which you get picture and sound from the system's tuner (or an external input).

26 JUKEBOX (page 116)

Press to display the Jukebox screen of the DVD recorder, from where you can copy music to the HDD for playback.

27 TV CONTROL (page 140)

After setting up, use these controls to control your TV.

TEXT

Starts the MHEG application display, if available, while watching a digital channel (UK only).

A.TV/D.TV

Switches between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV

indicators on the front panel show which is selected.

28 DISPLAY (page 97)

Displays/changes the on-screen information displays.

RDS DISP

Changes RDS displays (page 27).

29 MAIN/SUB

Change from MAIN to SUB to access the green functions/comments on the remote.

Using the remote control

Please keep in mind the following when using the remote control:

  • Make sure that there are no obstacles between the remote and the remote sensor on the unit.
  • Remote operation may become unreliable if strong sunlight or fluorescent light is shining on the unit's remote sensor.
  • Remote controllers for different devices can interfere with each other. Avoid using remotes for other equipment located close to this unit.
  • Replace the batteries when you notice a fall off in the operating range of the remote.
  • When the batteries run down or you change the batteries, the remote control mode is reset to Recorder 1. See Remote Control Mode on page 138.
  • Use within the operating range in front of the remote control sensor on the display unit, as shown.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the remote control - 1

Putting the batteries in the remote control

1 Open the battery compartment cover on the back of the remote control.
2 Insert two AA/R6 batteries into the battery compartment following the indications ( ,) inside the compartment.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Putting the batteries in the remote control - 1

3 Close the cover.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Close the cover. - 1

Caution

Incorrect use of batteries can result in hazards such as leakage and bursting. Please observe the following:

  • Don't mix new and old batteries together.
  • Don't use different kinds of battery together—although they may look similar, different batteries may have different voltages.
  • Make sure that the plus and minus ends of each battery match the indications in the battery compartment.
  • Remove batteries from equipment that isn't going to be used for a month or more.
  • When disposing of used batteries, please comply with governmental regulations or environmental public instruction's rules that apply in your country or area.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Caution - 1

WARNING

  • Do not use or store batteries in direct sunlight or other excessively hot place, such as inside a car or near a heater. This can cause batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire. It can also reduce the life or performance of batteries.

Chapter 5

Before you start

Switching on

The DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer have separate power switches. The power switch for the receiver subwoofer is located on the display unit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Switching on - 1
Remote Control

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Switching on - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Switching on - 3
DVD Recorder (DVR-545HX-S)

The table below shows what needs to be switched on for various system functions:

FunctionDisplay unitDVD recorder
DVD playbackOnOn
CD playbackOnOn
HDD playbackOnOn
RadioOnOff
Timer recordingOffOn

Setting up

After connecting and installing the DVD recorder and receiver subwoofer, complete the steps below to set the system up for use.

DVD recorder

  • Set the date and time, TV channel tuning and the type of TV in the Setup Navigator (page 56).

Receiver subwoofer

  • Switch off the display demo mode (page 21).
  • Complete the Auto MCACC setup to optimize the surround sound (page 21).

Basic operation

This manual is split into to parts, one covering using the receiver subwoofer, the other using the DVD recorder. Below are some common operations and where to find them explained in this manual.

Watching a DVD

Remember that when using the remote to control the DVD recorder, you should point the remote towards the display unit, not the recorder itself.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Watching a DVD - 1

1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.

Turn on your TV and make sure that it is set to the correct video input.

4 Press HDD/DVD.
5 Press OPEN/CLOSE on the DVD recorder to open the disc tray.
6 Load a disc.

Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you're loading a double-sided DVD disc, load it with the side you want to play face-down).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Watching a DVD - 2

7 Press (play) to start playback.

Press to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing . (Press again to cancel the resume function.)

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.

See Basic playback on page 88 for more on playing discs.

8 Adjust the volume.
9 Adjust the sound using the surround effects.

See Listening to your system on page 23 for details.

Listening to a CD

1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Press HDD/DVD.
4 Load a CD and start playback (page 90).
5 Adjust the volume.
6 Adjust the sound using the surround effects (page 23).

Watching a title recorded on the HDD

1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Switch on the DVD recorder.
3 Switch on your TV.
4 Press HDD/DVD.
5 Start playback of the HDD title (page 89).
6 Adjust the volume.
7 Adjust the sound using the surround effects (page 23).

Listening to the radio

1 Switch on the display unit (receiver subwoofer).
2 Tune to a station (page 26).
3 Adjust the volume.
4 Adjust the sound using the surround effects (page 23).

AUDIO MULTI-CHANNEL RECEIVER SUBWOOFER

SX-SW505HX

SPEAKER SYSTEM

S-ST606

Contents

01 Controls and displays

Display unit 20

Display 20

02 Getting started

System demo setting 21

Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound 21

03 Listening to your system

Auto listening mode 23
Listening in surround sound 23
Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings 23
Using Advanced Surround. 24
Listening in stereo 24
Using the Sound Retriever. 24
Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ 25
Enhancing dialogue. 25
Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes 25
Adjusting the bass and treble 25
Boosting the bass level 25

04 Listening to the radio

Listening to the radio 26

Improving poor FM reception 26
Improving poor AM sound 26
Changing the noise cut mode 26
Memorizing stations 26
Listening to station presets 27

Using RDS. 27

Displaying RDS information 27
Searching for RDS programs 27

05 Surround sound settings

Using the Setup menu 28

Channel level setting 28
Speaker distance setting 28
Dynamic Range Control 29
Dual mono setting. 29

Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone 29

06 Other connections

Connecting auxiliary components 30
Connecting an analog audio component. 30
Listening to an external audio source 30
Connecting external antennas 30
Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display. 31
SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays 31
Using the SR+ mode with a Pioneer plasma display. 32

07 Additional information

Dimming the display 33
DTS CD setting 33
Setting the sleep timer. 33
Resetting the system 33
Installation and maintenance 34
Hints on installation 34
Troubleshooting 34
General 34
Tuner. 35
Error Messages 35
Glossary. 36
Specifications 36

Chapter 1

Controls and displays

Display unit

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Display unit - 1

1 STANDBY/ON

Press to switch the system on/into standby.

2 Front panel display

See below for details.

3 VOLUME buttons

Use to adjust the volume.

4 AUDIO INPUT (page 30)

Press repeatedly to select one of the external audio inputs (DVD/DVR1, DVD/DVR2, DIGITAL or ANALOG).

5 SURROUND

Use to select a Surround mode (page 23).

6 IR remote sensor (page 14)

Display

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Display - 1

1 DTS

Lights during playback of a DTS source (page 23).

2 SURR.

Lights when one of the Advanced Surround listening modes is selected (page 24).

3 SOUND

Lights when Sound Retriever is active (page 24).

4 Tuner indicators

  • Lights when a broadcast is being received.

  • Lights when a stereo FM broadcast is being received in auto stereo mode.

  • Lights when FM mono reception is selected.
  • Lights when in one of the RDS display or search modes.

5 kHz/MHz

Indicates the frequency unit shown in the character display (kHz for AM, MHz for FM).

6 Character display

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Character display - 1

Lights when sleep timer is active (page 33).

8 PLII

Lights during Dolby Pro Logic II decoding (page 23).

9 D

Lights during playback of a Dolby Digital source (page 23).

Chapter 2

Getting started

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Getting started - 1

Important

  • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB.

System demo setting

Switches the automatic demo feature on or off (this starts when you plug in for the first time).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - System demo setting - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - System demo setting - 2

1 Switch the system into standby.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select DEMO from the menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER.

Select from:

  • DEMO ON - Switches the demo display on.
  • DEMO OFF - Switches the demo display off and the system into standby.

Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound

The Multichannel Acoustic Calibration (MCACC) system measures the acoustic characteristics of your listening area, taking into account ambient noise, and testing for channel delay and channel level. After you have set up the microphone provided, the system uses the information from a series of test tones to optimize the speaker settings and equalization (Acoustic Calibration EQ) for your particular room.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound - 1

Important

  • The test tones used for Auto MCACC setup are loud; however, do not turn the volume down during setup as this may result in a sub-optimal setup.
  • Make sure the microphone and speakers are not moved during the MCACC setup.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1
1 Connect the microphone to the MCACC SETUP MIC jack on the rear panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 2

2 Place the microphone at your normal listening position.

Place it about ear height, and make sure it is level by using a table or chair.

Make sure there are no obstacles between the speakers and the microphone.

3 If the receiver subwoofer is off, press RECEIVER to turn the power on.

4 Press MCACC.

Try to be as quiet as possible after pressing MCACC. The volume increases automatically and the system outputs a series of test tones.

  • To cancel Auto MCACC setup before it has finished, press MCACC. The unit will continue to use the previous settings.
  • If the ambient noise level is too high, NOISY blinks in the display for five seconds. To exit and check the noise levels1, press MCACC, or to try again, press ENTER when RETRY shows in the display.
  • If you see an ERR MIC or ERR SP message in the display, there may be a problem with your mic or the speaker connections. To try again, press ENTER when you see RETRY².

When the MCACC setup is complete, the volume level returns to normal, COMPLETE3 shows in the display, and Acoustic Calibration EQ is activated.4

Note

  1. If the room environment is not optimal for the Auto MCACC setup (too much ambient noise, echo off the walls, obstacles blocking the speakers from the microphone) the final settings may be incorrect. Check for household appliances (air conditioner, fridge, fan, etc.), that may be affecting the environment and switch them off if necessary.
  2. Some older TVs may interfere with the operation of the mic. If this seems to be happening, switch off the TV during Auto MCACC setup.
    2 If this doesn't work, press MCACC. turn off the power, and check the problem indicated by the ERR message, then try the Auto MCACC setup again.
    3 If COMPLETE doesn't appear, it is likely an error occurred during the setup. Please check all connections and try again.
    4 See Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ on page 25 to switch on/off Acoustic Calibration EQ.

Chapter 3

Listening to your system

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening to your system - 1

Important

  • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB.

Auto listening mode

The Auto listening mode is the simplest way to listen to any source as it was mastered: the output from the speakers mirrors the channels in the source material.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Auto listening mode - 1

- Press SURROUND to select the AUTO listening mode.

If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel D or DTS indicator lights.

  • You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode.

Listening in surround sound

You can listen to stereo or multichannel sources in surround sound. Surround sound is generated from stereo sources using one of the Dolby Pro Logic decoding modes.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening in surround sound - 1

- Press SURROUND repeatedly to select a listening mode.

  • You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode.

The choices that appear in the display will vary according to the type of source that's playing.

If the source is Dolby Digital or DTS, the front panel D or DTS indicator lights.

  • AUTO - Auto listening mode (see above)
    DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic) - 4.1 channel surround sound for use with any two-channel source
    MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie)-5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to movie sources, for use with any two-channel source
    MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) - 5.1 channel surround sound, especially suited to music sources, for use with any two-channel source; see Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings below
  • STEREO - See Listening in stereo on page 24

Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings

When listening in Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode (see above), there are three settings you can adjust: Center Width, Dimension, and Panorama.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Dolby Pro Logic II Music settings - 2

1 With Dolby Pro Logic II Music mode active, press SOUND.

2 Use / to select C WIDTH, DIMEN. or PANorama then press ENTER.

  • C WIDTH (Center Width) - Provides a better blend of the front speakers by spreading the center channel between the front right and left speakers, making it sound wider (higher settings) or narrower (lower settings).
  • DIMEN. (Dimension) - Adjusts the depth of the surround sound balance from front to back, making the sound more distant (minus settings), or more forward (positive settings).
  • PANorama - Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a 'wraparound' effect.

3 Use / to adjust the setting then press ENTER to confirm.

Using Advanced Surround

The Advanced Surround effects can be used with any multichannel or stereo source for a variety of additional surround sound effects.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using Advanced Surround - 1

  • Press ADVANCED to select an Advanced Surround mode.

Press repeatedly to select:

  • ADVMOVIE - Suitable for movies
  • ADVMUSIC - Suitable for music
    EXPANDED - Wide sound field
  • TV SURR. - Surround sound for mono or stereo TV broadcasts
  • SPORTS - Suitable for sports programming
  • GAME - Suitable for TV game units
    VIRTUAL - A virtual surround effect using just the subwoofer and front speakers.
  • 5 STEREO - Powerful surround sound for stereo music sources
  • FRTMOVIE / FRTMUSIC / EXTPower - These modes cannot be used.

Listening in stereo

You can listen to any source—stereo or multichannel—in stereo. When playing a multichannel source, all channels are downmixed to the front left/right speakers and the subwoofer.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening in stereo - 1

Press SURROUND repeatedly until STEREO shows in the display.
- You can also use the SURROUND button on the display unit to change the listening mode.

Using the Sound Retriever

When audio data is removed during the MP3 or WMA compression process, sound quality often suffers from an uneven sound image. The Sound Retriever feature employs new DSP technology that helps bring CD quality sound back to compressed 2-channel audio by restoring sound pressure and smoothing jagged artifacts left over after compression.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Sound Retriever - 1

  • This feature is effective when used together with the Jukebox function of the DVD recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Sound Retriever - 2

While listening to a stereo source, press SOUND RETRIEVER.

Press repeatedly to switch between:

  • RTRV ON — Switches the Sound Retriever on.
  • RTRV OFF — Switches the Sound Retriever off.

Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ

You can listen to sources using the Acoustic Calibration EQ set in Using the Auto MCACC setup for optimal surround sound on page 21.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening with Acoustic Calibration EQ - 1

1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select MCACC EQ then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to switch EQ ON or EQ OFF then press ENTER to confirm.

  • On the EQ OFF setting, equalization is set to off and speaker settings (channel delay and channel level) remains as it is set.
  • Acoustic Calibration EQ is set to on automatically after Auto MCACC setup is used.

Enhancing dialogue

The Dialogue Enhancement feature is designed to make the dialogue stand out from other background sounds in a TV or movie sound track.

1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select DIALOGUE then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the amount dialogue enhancement then press ENTER to confirm. Select between OFF, MID or MAX.

Using Quiet and Midnight listening modes

The Quiet listening feature reduces excessive bass or treble in a sound source.

The Midnight listening feature allows you to hear effective surround sound of movies at low volume levels.

1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select QUIET or MIDNIGHT then press ENTER to confirm.

  • To cancel the Quiet or Midnight listening modes, select BASS/TRE.

Adjusting the bass and treble

Use the bass and treble controls to adjust the overall tone.

1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select TONE then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select BASS/TRE then press ENTER.

  • Selecting BASS/TRE cancels the Quiet and Midnight listening modes. These modes cannot be used at the same time.

4 Use the / buttons to select BASS or TREBLE; use the / buttons to adjust the sound then press ENTER to confirm.

Boosting the bass level

There are two bass modes you can use to enhance the bass in a source.

1 Press SOUND.
2 Use the / buttons to select BASSMODE then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select the sound then press ENTER to confirm.

Select between OFF, MUSIC or CINEMA.

Chapter 4

Listening to the radio

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening to the radio - 1

Important

  • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB.

Listening to the radio

The tuner can receive both FM and AM broadcasts, and lets you memorize your favorite stations so you don't have to manually tune in every time you want to listen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening to the radio - 1

1 Press FM/AM to switch to the tuner, then press repeatedly to select the FM or AM band.

The display shows the band and frequency.

2 Tune to a frequency.

There are three tuning modes-manual, auto, and highspeed:

  • Manual tuning - Press TUNE +/- repeatedly to change the displayed frequency.
  • Auto tuning - Press and hold TUNE +/- until the frequency display starts to move, then release. The tuner will stop on the next station it finds. Repeat to keep searching.
  • High-speed tuning - Press and hold TUNE +/- until the frequency display starts to move rapidly. Keep the button held down until you reach the frequency you want. If necessary, fine tune the frequency using the manual tuning method.

Improving poor FM reception

If you're listening to an FM station in stereo but the reception is weak, you can improve the sound quality by switching to mono.

1 Tune to an FM radio station then press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to choose FM MODE then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select FM MONO then press ENTER.

The mono indicator () lights when the tuner is in mono reception mode.

Select FM AUTO above to switch back to auto-stereo mode (the stereo indicator () lights when receiving a stereo broadcast).

Improving poor AM sound

The simplest way to improve the sound quality of AM radio is to make sure that the TV in the room is switched off. Also try changing the position and direction of the AM loop antenna.

Changing the noise cut mode

If you find that the sound quality is bad even after trying the above, you may be able to improve it using a different noise cut mode. Just choose the one that sounds best.

1 Tune to an AM radio station then press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to choose NOISECUT then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select a Noise cut mode (1, 2 or 3) then press ENTER.

Memorizing stations

You can save up to 30 station presets so that you always have easy access to your favorite stations without having to tune in manually each time.

1 Tune to an AM or FM radio station.
For the FM band, select mono or auto-stereo reception as necessary. This setting is saved along with the preset.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to choose ST.MEM. then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select the station preset you want then press ENTER.

Listening to station presets

1 Make sure the tuner function is selected.
2 Use the ST + / - buttons to select a station preset.

  • Alternatively, use the number buttons to select a preset directly.

Using RDS

Radio Data System (RDS) is a system used by most FM radio stations to provide listeners with various kinds of information—the name of the station and the kind of show they're broadcasting, for example.

One feature of RDS is that you can search by type of program. For example, you can search for a station that's broadcasting a show with the program type, JAZZ.

You can search the following program types:

NEWS - News

AFFAIRS - Current Affairs

INFO - General Information

SPORT-Sport

EDUCATE - Educational

DRAMA - Radio plays, etc.

CULTURE - National or regional culture, theater, etc.

SCIENCE - Science and technology

VARIRED - Usually talk-based material, such as quiz shows or interviews.

POP M - Pop music

ROCK M - Rock music

EASY M - Easy listening

LIGHT M - 'Light' classical music

CLASSICS - 'Serious' classical music

OTHER M - Music not fitting above categories

WEATHER - Weather reports

FINANCE -Stock market reports, commerce,trading,etc.

CHILDREN - Programs for children

SOCIAL - Social affairs

RELIGION - Programs concerning religion

PHONE IN - Public expressing their views by phone

TRAVEL-Holiday-type travel rather than traffic announcements

LEISURE - Leisure interests and hobbies

JAZZ-Jazz

COUNTRY - Country music

NATION M - Popular music in a language other than English

OLDIES-Popular music from the '50s and 60s

FOLK M - Folk music

DOCUMENT - Documentary

Displaying RDS information

You can display the different types of RDS information available.2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Displaying RDS information - 1

Press RDS DISP for RDS information.

Each press changes the display as follows:

  • Radio Text (RT) - Messages sent by the radio station. For example, a talk radio station may provide a phone number as RT.
  • Program Service Name (PS) - The name of the radio station.
  • Program Type (PTY) - This indicates the kind of program currently being broadcast.
    SEARCH-PTY search (see below)
  • Current tuner frequency

Searching for RDS programs

You can search for a program type listed above.

1 Press the FM/AM button for the FM band.3

2 Press RDS DISP repeatedly until SEARCH appears in the display.

3 Use the / buttons to select the program type you want to hear.

4 Press ENTER to start the search.

The system searches the station presets for a match. If it finds one, searching stops for 5 sec.

5 If you want to keep listening to the station, press ENTER within the 5 seconds.

If you don't press ENTER, searching resumes.

Note

1 In addition, there are three other program types, TEST, ALARM, and NO TYPE. ALARM and TEST are used for emergency announcements. You can't search for these, but the tuner will switch automatically to this RDS broadcast signal. NO TYPE appears when a program type cannot be found.
2. If any noise is picked up while displaying the RT scroll, some characters may be displayed incorrectly.
- If you see NO DATA in the RT display, it means no RT data is sent from the broadcast station. The display will automatically switch to the PS data display (if no PS data, the frequency is displayed).
- In the PTY display, NO DATA or NO TYPE may be shown. In this case, the PS display is shown after a few seconds.

3 RDS is only possible in the FM band.

Chapter 5

Surround sound settings

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Surround sound settings - 1

Important

  • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB.

Using the Setup menu

From the Setup menu you can access all the surround sound settings of the system1, including channel levels, speaker distances, dynamic range adjustment and dual mono audio playback.

Use the following buttons to use the Setup menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Setup menu - 1

Channel level setting

The Auto MCACC feature (see page 21) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the channel levels you can improve the surround sound in your listening room.

This method of setting the channel levels allows you to listen to a source and adjust the levels of each playback channel. Note that the channel level settings for stereo playback are independent of the settings for surround sound playback.

A further method of setting the channel levels is to use the test tone method. See Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone on page 29 for more on this.

1 Select stereo or multichannel playback for a source.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CH LEVEL, then press ENTER.
4 Use / to select a channel; / to adjust the level of that channel.

  • You can adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.
  • If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, or a stereo source is playing in Auto mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels.

5 Press ENTER when you're finished.

  • If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here.

Speaker distance setting

The Auto MCACC feature (see page 21) should give you the best surround sound setup. However you may find that by further adjustment of the speaker distance settings you can improve the surround sound in your listening room.

Set the distance of each speaker from your normal listening position.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Use the / buttons to select DISTANCE, then press ENTER.
3 Use / to select a speaker; / to adjust the distance.

Adjust the following speakers:

L-Front left speaker
C Center speaker
R-Front right speaker
- SR-Surround right speaker
- SL-Surround left speaker
- SW - Subwoofer

Each speaker can be adjusted from 0.3m to 9.0m .

4 Press ENTER when you're finished.

  • If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press ENTER when you're finished. - 1

Note

1 There are other settings you can adjust from the Setup menu; these are explained in Listening to the radio on page 26 and Additional information on page 33.

Dynamic Range Control

When watching Dolby Digital or DTS material at low volume, low level sounds—including some of the dialog—can be difficult to hear properly. Using one of the Dynamic Range Control (DRC) settings can help by bringing up the low level sounds, while controlling high level peaks.

Dynamic Range Control works only with Dolby Digital soundtracks and some DTS soundtracks.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Use the / buttons to select DRC, then press ENTER.

3 Use / to select a setting.

Select one of the following:

  • DRC OFF (default) - No dynamic range adjustment (use when listening at higher volume)
  • DRC MID - Mid setting
  • DRC HIGH - Dynamic range is reduced (loud sounds are reduced in volume while quieter sounds are increased)

4 Press ENTER to exit.

Dual mono setting

Specifies how dual mono encoded Dolby Digital or DTS soundtracks should be played. You can also use this setting to switch the audio channel on DVD-RW discs recorded with bilingual audio.

1 Press SETUP.

2 Use the / buttons to select DUALMONO, then press ENTER.

3 Use / to select a setting.

Select one of the following:

  • CH1 MONO (default) - Only channel 1 is played
  • CH2 MONO - Only channel 2 is played
  • CH1/CH2 - Both channels are played through the front speakers

4 Press ENTER to exit.

Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone

If you prefer, you can set the channel levels using a test tone as a reference, rather than playing a source (see Channel level setting on page 28). A test tone is played through each speaker in turn, allowing you to adjust the level as it plays.

Note that the channel level settings for stereo sources are independent of the settings for surround sound sources.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Adjusting the channel levels using the test tone - 1

1 Press SURROUND to select the Auto listening mode.

  • If you want to set the channel levels for stereo (two channel) playback, select the STEREO listening mode.

2 Press TEST TONE.

The test tone is output from each speaker in turn.

3 While a test tone is playing, use the / buttons to adjust that channel level.

The aim is to adjust the levels so that you hear the test tone at the same volume from each speaker. You can adjust the level of each channel by ± 10 dB.

  • You can adjust the overall volume of test tone output using the VOLUME +/- buttons (this does not affect the channel level settings).
  • If the system is in Stereo or Virtual mode, you will not be able to adjust the center or surround channels.
  • Because of the ultra low frequencies the subwoofer produces, it may sound quieter than it really is. We suggest adjusting the subwoofer level while listening to a source. See the method described in Channel level setting on page 28.

4 When you're done, press ENTER to exit test tone setup.

  • If you use the Auto MCACC feature again, it will overwrite the settings you have made here.

Note

1 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Audio DRC on page 133.
2 This setting is effective for the speaker output. A similar adjustment feature is available on the DVD recorder—see Switching audio channels on page 96.

Chapter 6

Other connections

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other connections - 1

Important

  • When connecting this system or changing connections, be sure to switch power off and disconnect the power cord from the wall socket. After completing all connections, connect the power cord to the wall socket.

Connecting auxiliary components

This system has optical-type digital inputs. Use these to connect external components, such as your MD or CD recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting auxiliary components - 1
CD recorder,etc.

- Connect the DVD/DVR2 (OPTICAL) or DIGITAL (OPTICAL) jack on the rear panel to the optical output of an external playback component.

These include digital components such as an MD player, digital satellite, or a game system.

Connecting an analog audio component

You can use the ANALOG input jacks to connect an analog audio component, such as a tape player. See Using this system for TV audio on page 11 for connection details (this explains connecting the audio output from your TV, but any analog audio component can be connected).

Listening to an external audio source

You can connect both analog and digital external audio sources to this system. Digital audio sources include digital satellite receivers, CD recorders, etc. Analog sources include your TV. See also Using this system for TV audio on page 11 and Connecting auxiliary components above.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Listening to an external audio source - 1

1 If the system isn't already on, press RECEIVER to switch on.

Also make sure that the external source (TV, satellite receiver, etc.) is switched on.

2 Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input source.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Use the AUDIO IN button to select an audio input source. - 1

3 If necessary, start playback of the external source.

Connecting external antennas

For an external AM antenna, use 5 to 6 meters of vinylinsulated wire and set up either indoors or outdoors. Leave the loop antenna connected.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting external antennas - 1

For an external FM antenna, use a PAL connector to hook up an external FM antenna.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting external antennas - 2

Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display

If you have a Pioneer plasma display, you can use an SR + cable to connect it to this unit and take advantage of various convenient features, such as controlling this unit via the plasma display's remote sensor, automatic video input switching of the plasma display, display unit messages appearing on the plasma display screen, and automatic volume muting on the plasma display.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using this unit with a Pioneer plasma display - 1

Important

  • With an SR+ cable connected, the remote must now be pointed towards your plasma display rather than the display unit of the receiver subwoofer in order to control the receiver subwoofer.
  • Use a 3-ringed miniplug SR + cable to connect the CONTROL IN jack of this unit (through a media receiver, if applicable) to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display.

Before you can use the extra SR+ features, you need to make a few settings in the unit—see SR+ Setup for Pioneer plasma displays below.

SR + Setup for Pioneer plasma displays

Make the following settings if you have connected a Pioneer plasma display to this unit using an SR+ cable.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - SR + Setup for Pioneer plasma displays - 1

1 Press SR+.
2 Use the / buttons to choose SETUP, then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to choose the setting you want to adjust.

The current setting is shown for each option as you cycle through the display. See below for a full list and description of each.

4 Use the / buttons to adjust the setting.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 to make other settings.
6 When you're done, press ENTER to leave the SR+ setup menu.

Note

This system is compatible with all Pioneer plasma displays from 2003 onward.
2 The 3-ringed SR+ cable from Pioneer is commercially available under the part number ADE7095. Contact the Pioneer Customer Support division for more information on obtaining an SR+ cable.
3 You won't be able to use the remote sensor of this unit with the CONTROL IN jack of this unit connected to the CONTROL OUT jack of your plasma display. You can use the remote sensor of the plasma display (even in standby) as long as the power isn't switched off.

Automatic plasma display volume muting

When Volume Control is switched on, the volume of the plasma display is automatically muted when the receiver subwoofer is switched on, or the receiver subwoofer's input function is changed to one that you would want to hear the sound from the receiver subwoofer rather than the plasma display (DVD, for example).

VOL.CON- When this unit is switched on, or the input function is changed, the volume on the plasma display is muted so only sound from this unit is heard.
VOL.C OFF - This unit does not control the volume of the plasma display.

Automatic plasma display input switching

In order that the plasma display can switch automatically to the correct input when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer, you need to tell it how your system is connected.

For example, if you connected your DVD recorder to the DV1 input on the receiver subwoofer, and to input 2 on your plasma display, select the DV1 PDP2 setting here so that when you switch the input function of the receiver subwoofer to DV1 to watch your DVD recorder, the plasma display will automatically switch to input 2.

For each receiver subwoofer input function (DV1 (DVD/ DVR1), DV2 (DVD/DVR2), DIG (DIGITAL), ANA (ANALOG)) you can select:

  • NONE - does not switch the plasma display input
  • PDP1 to PDP5 - switches the plasma display input to one of the numbered inputs (1 to 5)
    TVTN - switches the plasma display to its built-in TV tuner

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Automatic plasma display input switching - 1

Note

  • The number of video inputs available will depend on the plasma display you've connected.
  • The PDP5 input may be called 'PC Input' (or similar) on your plasma display.
  • The SR+ setting remains in effect even in standby.
  • The SR+ setting does not affect the FM/AM tuner function.

Using the SR + mode with a Pioneer plasma display

1 Press SR+ on the remote.
2 Use to select SR+ ON then press ENTER.

  • The SR + setting is maintained even after switching the receiver subwoofer into standby then back on. Automatic muting and input switching will be effective when the receiver subwoofer is switched on.
  • If you disconnect the SR+ cable or switch the plasma display off while SR+ is on, the SR+ ON setting remains.
    To switch to SR + OFF, follow steps 1 and 2, selecting SR+ OFF.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the SR + mode with a Pioneer plasma display - 1

Note

  • You can control this unit with the plasma display's remote sensor even in standby, but you can't control this unit with either this unit's remote sensor or the plasma display's remote sensor when the plasma display is switched off (AC off) and the SR+ cable is connected to the CONTROL IN jack of this unit.

Chapter 7

Additional information

Important

  • To access green functions on the remote, move the slider switch from MAIN to SUB.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

Dimming the display

You can choose to dim the display if you find it too bright.

1 Press SETUP.
2 Use the / buttons to select DIMMER then press ENTER.
3 Use the / buttons to select LIGHT or DARK then press ENTER.

DTS CD setting

If you play a DTS-encoded CD, you will need to change this setting to hear the decoded signal.

1 Switch the system into standby.
2 Press SETUP.
3 Use the / buttons to select CD TYPE from the menu, then press ENTER.
4 Use the / buttons to select a setting, then press ENTER.

Select from:

  • NORMAL - Use for playback of regular audio CDs. Some DTS-encoded CDs will output noise when played.
  • DTS-CD - Use for playback of DTS-encoded CDs, but note that the beginning of regular CD tracks may be skipped.

Setting the sleep timer

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Setting the sleep timer - 1

The sleep timer switches off the receiver subwoofer after a specified time so you can fall asleep without worrying about it.2

1 Press the SLEEP button to select an option.

Choose between the following options:

  • SLP ON - Switches off after about an hour
  • SLP OFF - Cancels the sleep timer

After selecting SLP ON, you can press SLEEP again to check how much time is left. Each line indicates approximately 12 minutes (remaining):

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the SLEEP button to select an option. - 1

Resetting the system

Use this procedure to reset all system settings to the factory default.

1 Switch the system on.
2 Press and hold SURROUND then press the STANDBY/ON button on the display unit.

The next time you switch on, all the system settings should be reset.

Note

1 The display dims when the sleep timer is set, regardless of this setting.
2 The display dims when the sleep timer is set. The DVD recorder does not automatically switch off with the sleep timer.

Installation and maintenance

Hints on installation

We want you to enjoy using this system for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a location:

Do...

Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack.

Don't...

X Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances.
±bx Place on a window sill or other place where the system will be exposed to direct sunlight.
X Use in an excessively dusty or damp environment.
±bx Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
X Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference—especially if the television uses an indoor antenna.
X Use in a kitchen or other room where the system may be exposed to smoke or steam.
X Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling of the system unit.
× Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the system unit's feet.

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operations are often mistaken for trouble and malfunctions. If you think that there is something wrong with this component, check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after exercising the checks listed below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.

  • If the system does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity disconnect the plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.
  • If there is no sound or no multichannel sound from the DVR-545HX-S DVD recorder, try setting the recorder's audio-related settings back to their defaults—see The Initial Setup menu on page 129.

General

ProblemRemedy
The power does not turn on, or switches off suddenly (an error message may be displayed at startup).·Leave the unit plugged in, wait for one minute, then switch back on. ·Make sure there are no loose strands of wire touching the unit. This could cause the system to shut off automatically. ·Check that the speakers are connected correctly. ·Make sure there is enough space for ventilation around the receiver subwoofer. ·Make sure the voltage of the mains power source is correct for the model. ·Try reducing the volume level. ·If the problem persists, take it to your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
No sound is output when an input function is selected.·If you're playing from the DVD recorder, make sure that the digital coaxial cable is connected properly. Also make sure that the DVD recorder's Digital Out and DTS Out settings are set to On, and that the MPEG Out setting is set to MPEG → PCM. ·If you're using the line input, make sure the component is connected correctly (see Connecting auxiliary components on page 30). ·Turn up the volume.
No sound from surround or center speakers.Refer to Channel level setting on page 28 to check the speaker levels. Check that you haven't selected the AUTO, STEREO, or VIRTUAL mode (see Listening in surround sound on page 23). Connect the speakers properly (refer to Connecting up on page 8). If you're playing from the DVD recorder, check that the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. If the source is 96 kHz, this will be played in stereo. If you want to play it in surround sound, set the DVD recorder's 96 kHz PCM Out setting to 96 kHz → 48 kHz. With television broadcasts, this unit will only output to two channels. To hear a broadcast in multichannel sound, select DOLBY PL (Dolby Pro Logic), MOVIE (Dolby Pro Logic II Movie) or MUSIC (Dolby Pro Logic II Music) in surround mode (on page 23) or an Advanced surround mode (on page 24).
Can't operate using the remote control.Replace the batteries (Putting the batteries in the remote control on page 15). Operate within 7 m, 30° of the remote sensor (Using the remote control on page 14). Remove any obstacles or operate from another position. Avoid exposing the remote sensor on the front panel to direct light. For operating the DVD recorder, make sure that the control cable and coaxial cable are connected. (page 8) If the receiver subwoofer is connected to a Pioneer plasma display with an SR+ cable, check that the plasma display is switched on. Point the remote control at the plasma display in order to operate the receiver subwoofer. Check that nothing is mistakenly plugged into the CONTROL IN jack.

Tuner

ProblemRemedy
Considerable noise in radio broadcasts.·Connect the AM antenna (refer to Connecting up on page 8) and adjust the direction and position for best reception. You may also connect an additional internal or external AM antenna (refer to Connecting external antennas on page 30). ·Fully extend the FM wire antenna, position for best reception, and secure to a wall. You may also connect an outdoor FM antenna (see Connecting external antennas on page 30). ·Turn off other equipment that may be causing the noise or move it further away.
Auto tuning does not pick up some stations.·The radio signal is weak. Auto tuning will only detect radio stations with a good signal. For more sensitive tuning, connect an outdoor antenna.

Error Messages

MessageDescription
2CH ONLY·An operation is prohibited because it is only applicable to 2 channel sources, while the current source is a multichannel source.
96K·An operation is prohibited because the source is 96 kHz digital.
EXIT·Appears when a menu is automatically exited after a set period of inactivity.
NOISY·Background noise is too high to complete MCACC setup successfully.
ERR MIC·An error occurred during MCACC setup because the microphone is not connected or is not connected properly.
ERR SP·An error occurred during MCACC setup because the speakers are not connected or are not connected properly.
EEP ERROR·Contact your Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer for servicing.
NO SPTYP·Try switching the unit off then on again. If the error still appears, please contact a Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer.
Glossary
Dolby DigitalA multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Dolby Laboratories that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding.
DOLBY DIGITAL PRODIGIAL
Dolby Pro Logic IIA matrix decoding technology developed by Dolby Laboratories that expands any two-channel source audio, such as CDs and TV broadcasts, to a five-channel playback (left/center/right/left surround/right surround), resulting in a surround experience.
DTS DIGITAL SURROUNDA multi-channel audio encoding system developed by Digital Theater Systems that enables far more audio to be stored on a disc than PCM encoding.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. "Dolby", "Pro Logic" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. "DTS" and "DTS Digital Surround" are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

Specifications

SX-SW505HX Audio Multi-channel Receiver Subwoofer

- Amplifier section

RMS Power Output: Front, Center, Surround. 100 W per channel (1 kHz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω) Subwoofer. 100 W (100 Hz, 10 % T.H.D., 4 Ω)

FM tuner section

Frequency range. 87.5 MHz to 108 MHz Antenna . 75Ω, unbalanced

AMtuner section

Frequency range. 531 kHz to 1602 kHz Antenna. Loop antenna

Subwoofer section

Enclosure. Bass-reflex floor type
System 16 cm 1-way system
Speaker 16 cm cone type
Nominal impedance 4 Ω
Frequency range 25 Hz to 1.0 kHz
Maximum Input Power 100 W

Miscellaneous

Power requirements AC 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption in standby. 0.3 W
Dimensions .. 200 mm (W) x 375 mm (H) x 437 mm (D)
Weight .. 9.0 kg

- Accessories

Remote control 1
Display unit 1
AA/R6 dry cell batteries (to confirm operation) 2
Coaxial cable 1
Control cable 1
Display cable 1
AM loop antenna 1
FM wire antenna 1
Microphone (for Auto MCACC setup) 1
Power cord 1
Warranty card 1
These operating instructions

S-ST606 Speaker system

(From speakers x2, surround speakers x2, center speaker x1)

- Front/surround speakers

Enclosure ..Closed-box floorstanding type (magnetically shielded)

System. 2-way system Speakers:

Woofer 7.7 cm cone type x2

Tweeter 2.6 cm semi-dome type Nominal impedance . 4Ω

Frequency range 70 Hz to 20 kHz

Maximum input power 100 W

Dimensions.260 mm (W) x 1096.5 mm (H) x 260 mm (D)

Weight 4.2 kg

Center speaker

Enclosure Closed-box bookshelf type (magnetically shielded)

System 7.7 cm 1-way system

Speakers. 7.7 cm cone type

Nominal impedance 4 Ω

Frequency range 75 Hz to 20 kHz

Maximum input power 100 W

Dimensions.270 mm (W) x 96 mm (H) x 90 mm (D)

Weight 0.78 kg

- Accessories

Speaker cables. 5

Non-skid pads (small) 4

Non-skid pads (large) 4

Non-skid pads (large) 16

Speaker stand bases 4

Screws (for bases) 12

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Accessories - 1

Note

  • Specifications and design subject to possible modification without notice, due to improvements.

DVD Recorder

DVR-545HX-S

Contents

01 Before you start

Disc/content format playback compatibility. 41

About the internal hard disk drive 44

Symbols used in this manual. 45

02 Connecting up

Rear panel connections 46

Front panel connections 46

Common Interface. 47

Connecting a TV antenna. 47

Easy connections. 48

Using other types of audio/video output. 48

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver. 49

Connecting an external decoder box (1) 50

Connecting an external decoder box (2) 50

Connecting using HDMI 51

Connecting other AV sources 52

Connecting a USB device 53

Plugging in 53

03 Controls and displays

Front panel 54

Display. 55

04 Getting started

Switching on and setting up 56

For users receiving digital broadcast services 58

Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ ^TM system. 59

05 Using the GUIDE Plus+TM electronic program guide

TheGUIDEPlus ^+ system 62

Using the GUIDE Plus+ system. 62

Areas. 64

GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting 73

06 Using the digital electronic program guide

The Digital EPG system 75

Using the Digital EPG 75

Setting timer programs 76

Other useful EPG functions 77

07 Recording

About DVD recording. 78

About HDD recording 79

Recorded audio 79

Restrictions on video recording 79

Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners 80

Setting the picture quality/recording time 82

Basic recording from the TV 82

Pause Live TV. 83

Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play)...85

Recording from an external component. 85

Playing your recordings on other DVD players. 86

Initializing recordable DVD discs 87

08Playback

Introduction. 88

Basic playback. 88

Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc. 91

Scanning discs 93

Playing in slow motion. 93

Frame advance/frame reverse 93

The Play Mode menu 93

Displaying and switching subtitles 95

Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks 96

Switching audio channels 96

Switching camera angles 96

Displaying disc information on-screen. 97

09 Playing and recording from a DV camcorder

Playing from a DV camcorder 98

Recording from a DV camcorder 98

DV video setting. 99

About DV. 99

10 Editing

Editing options. 100

The Disc Navigator screen. 101

11 Copying and backup

Introduction 110

One Touch Copy 110

Using Copy Lists 111

Using disc backup 114

12 Using the Jukebox

Copying music to the HDD. 116

Copying files from a USB device. 116

Playing music from the Jukebox. 116

Editing Jukebox albums 117

13 The PhotoViewer

Locating JPEG picture files. 118

Playing a slideshow 119

Importing files to the HDD 120

Importing files from a USB device 121

Copying selected files to a DVD-R/RW. 121

Editing files on the HDD. 121

Printing files 123

14 The Disc Setup menu

Basic settings. 124

Initialize settings. 124

Finalize settings 125

Optimize HDD 125

Initialize HDD 125

15 The Video Adjust menu

Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs 126

Setting the picture quality for disc playback 127

16 The Initial Setup menu

Using the Initial Setup menu 129

Selecting other languages for language options... 139

Using Software Update (Digital tuner) 139

17 Additional information

Setting up the remote to control your TV. 140

TV Preset code list 141

Minimum copying times 142

Manual recording modes 143

Troubleshooting 144

On-screen displays and recorder displays. 148

Language code list 150

Country/Area code list 150

Screen sizes and disc formats 151

Handling discs 152

Cleaning the pickup lens 152

Condensation 152

Hints on installation 153

Moving the recorder 153

Resetting the recorder 153

Specifications. 154

Chapter 1 Before you start

Disc / content format playback compatibility

Compatible media

DVD-RW ver. 1.1/1x/1x to 2x, ver. 1.2/2x to 4x/2x to 6x
DVD-R ver. 2.0 / 1x / 1x to 4x / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x , ver. 2.1 / 1x to 8x / 1x to 16x
DVD+RW 1x to 2.4x / 1x to 4x / 3.3x to 8x
DVD+R 1x to 2.4x/1x to 4x/1x to 8x/1x to 16x
DVD-RAM ver. 2.0/2x, ver. 2.1/2x/2x to 3x/2x to 5x, ver. 2.2/2x/2x to 3x/2x to 5x
DVD-R DL ver. 3.0/2x to 4x
DVD+R DL 2.4x/2.4x to 8x

Note that older models of DVD recorders and DVD writers may reject DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs and/or corrupt the data on the disc. If you want to share DVD-RW discs between this recorder and an older recorder/writer, we recommend using ver. 1.1 discs.

The following table shows older Pioneer DVD recorders' limited compatibility with DVD-RW ver. 1.2 discs.

ModelPlayableRecordable
DVR-7000Yes1,2,3No
DVR-3100 / DVR-5100HYes1No

1 Discs should be finalized in this recorder before playing. Unfinalized VR mode and Video mode discs may not play.
2 Cannot read the CPRM information will show in the display when you load a disc. However, this will not affect playback.
3 Copy-once protected disc titles will not play.

DVD/HDD Recording and playback compatibility

This recorder can play and record all the currently popular DVD disc types, as well as providing HDD functionality. The table below shows some specific compatibility differences between the different disc types.

HDDDVD-RDVD-RWDVD+RDVD+RWDVD-RAM
Marks used in this manualHDDDVD (VR)DVD (Video)DVD (VR)DVD (Video) *DVD+RDVD+RWDVD-RAM
*1*12*13, 16
LogosHDDDVDDVDDVDRWRWDVD
NAME/DRYNERWRWDVD+RDVD-RWDVD-RW
RWRW
RW
RW
RW
Re-recordable / Erasable*3*3*3●*14
Editing of recorded programs●*4●*4●*4●*4
Recording of Copy-once protected material●*12●*12●*12
Playback in other players/recordersn/a*5●*6*7●*6●*6, 15●*8●*9
Chase play
16:9 and 4:3 program recording
Bilingual broadcast recording of both audio channels●*10, 11●*11●*11●*11

Notes to table

1 Must be initialized for VR mode recording (page 124)
2 Must be initialized for Video mode recording (page 124)
3 Erasable, but free space does not increase
4 Cannot erase sections, edit chapters or use playlist editing
5 Must be compatible with DVD-R(VR) playback
6 Finalize using this recorder (may not playback in some units) (page 86)
7 Must be compatible with DVD-RW(VR) playback
8 Must be compatible with DVD+RW playback
9 Must be compatible with DVD-RAM playback
10 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (page 135)
11 Only when the recording mode is not set to LPCM
12 CPRM-compatible discs only
13 Take the disc out of the cartridge before use. Only Panasonic and Maxell discs have been tested to work reliably with this recorder. Discs from other makers may become unusable when recorded or edited.
14 Erasing a title does not increase the available recording time, nor increase the number of recordable titles left.
15 Must be compatible with DVD+R playback
16 Depending on the disc, it may have to be initialized before it can be recorded (page 124). In this case, initialization will take about 1 hour.

DVD is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation.

Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs

DVD-R DL (Dual-Layer) and DVD+R DL (Double-Layer) discs contain two recordable layers on a single side, giving about 1.8 times the recording capacity of a conventional single-layer disc. This unit can record to both DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL discs.

  • If you intend to play DVD-R DL (Video mode) or DVD+R DL discs recorded on this unit on other DVD recorders/players, you must finalize them. (Note that some DVD recorders/players may not play even finalized DL discs.)
    Please read the information provided on the disc packaging carefully before purchasing DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs:
  • Confirm the disc version: Use ver. 3.0 / 2x to 4x DVD-R discs.
  • Confirm the recording speed: DVD-R should be compatible with 2x or 4x recording; DVD+R with 2.4x to 8x recording.
  • This logo indicates that the disc is a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc:

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs - 1
RDL 4X/2X

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs - 2
DVD+R DL

  • Correct operation has been confirmed for DVD-R DL discs (ver. 3.0 / 2x , 4x) produced by the following manufacturers: Mitsubishi Kagaku Media, Verbatim (as of March 2005).

About DualDisc playback

A DualDisc is a new two-sided disc, one side of which contains DVD content-video, audio, etc. -while the other side contains non-DVD content such as digital audio material.

The non-DVD, audio side of the disc is not compliant with the CD Audio specification and therefore may not play.

It is possible that when loading or ejecting a DualDisc, the opposite side to that being played will be scratched. Scratched discs may not be playable.

The DVD side of a DualDisc plays in this product. DVD-Audio content will not play.

For more detailed information on the DualDisc specification, please refer to the disc manufacturer or disc retailer.

Other disc compatibility

In addition to DVD, this recorder is compatible with a wide range of disc types (media) and formats. Playable discs will generally feature one of the following logos on the disc and/or disc packaging. Note however that some disc types, such as recordable CD (and DVD), may be in an unplayable format—see below for further compatibility information.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other disc compatibility - 1
Audio CD

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other disc compatibility - 2
CD-R

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other disc compatibility - 3
CD-RW

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other disc compatibility - 4
Video CD

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other disc compatibility - 5
Super Vide

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Other disc compatibility - 6
CD (Super VCD)

CD-R/-RW compatibility

This recorder cannot record CD-R or CD-RW discs.

  • Readable formats: CD-Audio, Video CD/Super VCD, ISO 9660 CD-ROM* containing MP3, WMA, JPEG or DivX files.
  • ISO 9660 Level 1 or 2 compliant. CD physical format: Mode1, Mode2 XA Form1. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this recorder.
  • Multi-session playback: Yes (except CD-Audio and Video CD/Super VCD)
  • Unfinalized disc playback: CD-Audio only

Compressed audio compatibility

  • Compatible media: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, USB.
  • Compatible formats: MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3), Windows Media Audio (WMA)
  • Sampling rates: 32 kHz, 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz
  • Bit-rates: Any (128 kbps or higher recommended)
    Variable bit-rate (VBR) MP3 playback: Yes
    VBR WMA playback: No

  • WMA encoder compatibility: Windows Media Codec 8 (files encoded using Windows Media Codec 9 may be playable but some parts of the specification are not supported; specifically, Pro, Lossless, Voice and VBR)

  • DRM (Digital Rights Management)1 file playback: No
  • File extensions: .mp3, .wma (these must be used for the recorder to recognize MP3 and WMA files - do not use for other file types)
  • File structure: Up to 99 folders / 999 files (if these limits are exceeded, only files and folders up to these limits are playable)

WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - WMA (Windows Media Audio) compatibility - 1

Plays

Windows MediaTM

The Windows Media® logo printed on the box indicates that this recorder can playback Windows Media Audio content.

WMA is an acronym for Windows Media Audio and refers to an audio compression technology developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA content can be encoded by using Windows Media Player for Windows XP, Windows Media Player 9 or Windows Media Player 10 series.

Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

DivX video compatibility

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DivX video compatibility - 1

DivX is a compressed digital video format created by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. This recorder can play DivX video files burned on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD-Video, individual DivX video files are called "Titles." When naming files/ titles on a CD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabetical order.

  • Official DivX® Certified product.
  • Plays all versions of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX® media files.

  • File extensions: .avi and .divx (these must be used for the recorder to recognize DivX video files). Note that all files with the .avi extension are recognized as MPEG4, but not all of these are necessarily DivX video files and therefore may not be playable on this recorder.

  • File structure: Up to 99 folders or 999 files.

DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license.

DivX® VOD content

DivX

In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this recorder, you first need to register the recorder with your DivX VOD content provider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD registration code, which you submit to your provider.

Some DivX VOD content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), the message Rental Expired is displayed.

If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your recorder and play the content as often as you like, and no message will be displayed.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DivX® VOD content - 1

Important

  • DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Digital Rights Management) system. This restricts playback of content to specific, registered devices.
  • If you load a disc that contains DivX VOD content not authorized for this recorder, the message Authorization Error is displayed and the content will not play.
  • Resetting the recorder (as described in Resetting the recorder on page 153) will not cause you to lose your registration code.

Note

1 DRM (digital rights management) copy protection is a technology designed to prevent unauthorized copying by restricting playback, etc. of compressed audio files on devices other than the PC (or other recording equipment) used to record it. For detailed information, please see the instruction manuals or help files that came with your PC and/or software.

JPEG file compatibility

  • Compatible formats: Baseline JPEG and EXIF 2.2 still image files
    File format used by digital still cameras
  • Sampling ratio: 4:4:4, 4:2:2, 4:2:0
    Horizontal resolution: 160 to 5120 pixels
    Vertical resolution: 120 to 3840 pixels
  • Progressive JPEG compatible: No
  • File extensions: .jpg, .jpeg, .jpe, .jf, .jfif (must be used for the recorder to recognize JPEG files - do not use for other file types)
  • File structure: The recorder can load up to 99 folders / 999 files at one time (if there are more files/folders that this on the disc then more can be reloaded)

PC-created disc compatibility

Discs recorded using a personal computer may not be playable in this unit due to the setting of the application software used to create the disc. In these particular instances, check with the software publisher for more detailed information.

Discs recorded in packet write mode (UDF format) are not compatible with this recorder.

Check the DVD-R/-RW or CD-R/-RW software disc boxes for additional compatibility information.

Dolby Digital

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Dolby Digital - 1

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

"Dolby" and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

DTS

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DTS - 1

"DTS" and "DTS Digital Out" are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.

DVB

The Digital Video Broadcasting Project, or DVB for short, is a set of open standards for digital broadcasting, covering terrestrial, cable and satellite broadcasts.

Based around the MPEG-2 coding system, these open standards ensure that compliant systems are able to work together, independent of manufacturer.

DVB is extremely flexible, being able to deliver virtually any kind of digital content to the home, including High Definition and Standard Definition TV, broadband multimedia content and interactive services.

DVB

DVB is a registered trademark of the DVB Project.

About the internal hard disk drive

The internal hard disk drive is a fragile piece of equipment. Depending on the conditions under which it is used, or through careless use, it is possible that the recorded contents will be damaged or lost completely, or that normal playback and recording will not be possible. Please understand that in the event of repair or replacement of the HDD or related components, all your HDD recordings will be lost.

Please use the recorder following the guidelines below to protect against possible HDD failure.

The HDD should not be regarded as a place to store recordings permanently. We recommend that you back up your important recordings onto DVD discs in order to protect against accidental loss.

Pioneer cannot under any circumstances accept responsibility for any direct or indirect loss arising from any inconvenience or loss of recorded material resulting from HDD failure.

  • Do not move the recorder while it is on (this includes during EPG download when the display shows EPG).
    Install and use the recorder on a stable, level surface.
  • Do not block the rear vent/cooling fan.
  • Do not use the recorder in excessively hot or humid places, or in places that may be subject to sudden changes in temperature. Sudden changes in temperature can cause condensation to form inside the recorder. This can be a cause of HDD failure.
    While the recorder is switched on (including during EPG download when the display shows EPG), do not unplug from the wall socket or switch the electricity off from the breaker switch.
  • Do not move the recorder immediately after switching it off. If you need to move the recorder, please follow the steps below:

1 After the message POWER OFF is shown in the display, wait at least two minutes.
2 Unplug from the wall socket.
3 Move the recorder.
- If there's a power failure while the recorder is on there is a chance that some data on the HDD will be lost.

  • The HDD is very delicate. If used improperly or in an unsuitable environment, it is possible that the HDD will fail after a few years of use. Signs of problems include playback unexpectedly freezing and noticeable block noise (mosaic) in the picture. However, sometimes there will be no warning signs of HDD failure. If the HDD fails, no playback of recorded material will be possible. In this case it will be necessary to replace the HDD unit.

Optimizing HDD performance

As you record and edit material on the HDD, the data on the disk becomes fragmented, eventually affecting the recorder's performance. Before this happens, the recorder will warn you that it is time to optimize the HDD (which you can do from the Disc Setup menu; see Optimize HDD on page 125).

Symbols used in this manual

The following icons are provided to help you quickly identify which instructions you need for which kind of disc.

HDDHDD
DVDAny type of DVD disc (recordable or playback only), finalized or not.
DVD-VideoCommercially produced DVD, finalized Video mode DVD-R/-RW.
DVD (Video)Video mode DVD-R/-RW (unfinalized)
DVD (VR)VR mode DVD-R/-RW
DVD+RDVD+R
DVD+RWDVD+RW
DVD-RAMDVD-RAM
CDAudio CD
Video CDVideo CD
Super VCDSuper VCD
WMA/MP3WMA or MP3 files
DivXDivX files
ALLAll of the above

Chapter 2

Connecting up

Rear panel connections

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Rear panel connections - 1

1 AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector

Audio/video output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a TV or other equipment with a SCART connector. The video output is switchable between video, S-video and RGB. See page AV1 Out on page 132 for how to set this up.

2 AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector

Audio/video input/output SCART-type AV connector for connecting to a VCR, or other equipment with a SCART connector. The input accepts video, S-video and RGB. See AV2/L1 In on page 132 for how to set this up.

3 COMPONENTVIDEO OUT

A high-quality video output for connecting to a TV or monitor with a component video input.

4 CONTROL IN

Connect to the CONTROL OUT terminal of the receiver subwoofer.

5 G-LINKTM

Use to connect the supplied G-LINK™ cable to enable GUIDE Plus+™ to control an external satellite receiver, etc.

6 ANTENNA IN (RF IN)/OUT

Connect your TV antenna to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA OUT jack for connection to your TV.

7 ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN/OUT

Connect your DTV antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN jack. The signal is passed through to the ANTENNA DIGITAL) OUT jack for connection to your TV.

8 COMMON INTERFACE slot

Slot for CA module and smart card used to decode scrambled D.TV channels. See Common Interface on page 47.

9 HDMI OUT

HDMI output for high quality digital audio and video.

10 AC IN - Power inlet

11 OUTPUT

Stereo analog audio, video and S-video outputs for connection to a TV or AV amplifier/receiver.

12 INPUT 3

Stereo analog audio, video and S-video inputs for connection to a VCR or other source component.

13 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COAXIAL

Connect to the DVD/DVR1 coaxial jack on the receiver subwoofer.

Front panel connections

On the front panel a flip-down cover hides more connections.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Front panel connections - 1

14 USB port (Type B)

USB port for connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer.

15 USB port (Type A)

USB port for connecting a digital camera, USB memory or other USB device.

16 DV IN

A DV input i.LINK connector, suitable for connecting a DV camcorder.

17 INPUT 2

Audio/video input (stereo analog audio; composite and S-video), especially suitable for camcorders, game consoles, portable audio, etc.

Common Interface

To receive scrambled D.TV channels you will need a CA module and smart card provided by your service provider.

Different CA modules support different encryption systems. This recorder is designed to work with modules that support the DVB standard. Contact your service provider to obtain the right kind of CA module.

Note that neither CA modules nor smart cards are supplied or sold by Pioneer.

Inserting a CA module

The Common Interface card slot is located on the rear panel of the recorder.

1 Push the latch to release the slot cover on the rear of the recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Push the latch to release the slot cover on the rear of the recorder. - 1

2 Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as it will go.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Insert the CA module into the card slot as far as it will go. - 1

The Common Interface card slot accepts Type I and Type II PC Cards (PCMCIA cards).

Connecting a TV antenna

This recorder has separate built-in TV tuners for terrestrial digital and terrestrial analog TV broadcasts.

If you are ready to receive digital broadcasts now, use the longer of the supplied RF antenna cables to connect the output of your antenna to the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) IN connector. Next use the short supplied RF antenna cable and connect it between the ANTENNA (DIGITAL) OUT and ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connectors. Lastly, connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting a TV antenna - 1

If your area is not yet served with terrestrial digital services, connect your antenna's output to the ANTENNA IN (RF IN) connector using one of the supplied RF antenna cables. Next, connect the recorder to your TV from the ANTENNA OUT connector.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting a TV antenna - 2

We strongly recommend using an outdoor antenna for better broadcast picture quality.

If, however, you want to use an indoor antenna, use one with a signal amplifier rated at 5V 30 mA and set Aerial Power to On in the Initial Setup menu (see page 130).

Easy connections

The setup described below is a basic setup that allows you to watch and record TV programs, and play discs. Other types of connections are explained starting on the following page.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Easy connections - 1

Important

  • These connections use SCART cables (not supplied). If your TV (or VCR) does not have a SCART connection, if you want to use the supplied audio/video cable, see Using the S-video or component video output on page 48.
  • The AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector can output ordinary (composite), S-video or RGB video, plus stereo analog audio. The AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector accepts ordinary, S-video and RGB video input, as well as stereo analog audio. See AV1 Out on page 132 and AV2/L1 In on page 132 for how to set them up.
  • Before making or changing any rear panel connections, make sure that all components are switched off and unplugged from the wall outlet.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV. See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 for details.

  • If you want to incorporate a VCR in your setup, connect it before the recorder (i.e., between the antenna wall outlet and the antenna input on the recorder).

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector on this recorder to the SCART AV connector on your TV.

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your VCR.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 2

Tip

  • This recorder has a 'through' function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power Save on page 129).

Using other types of audio/video output

If you can't use the SCART AV connector to connect your TV to this recorder, there are standard audio/video output jacks, as well as an S-video and component video output.

Using the S-video or component video output

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the S-video or component video output - 1

1 Connect the S-video or component video output to a similar input on your TV.

For an S-video connection, use an S-video cable (not supplied) to connect the S-VIDEO OUTPUT jack to an S-video input on your TV.

For a component video connection, use a component video cable (not supplied) to connect the COMPONENT VIDEO OUT JACKS to a component video input on your TV.

See also Component Video Out on page 132 for how to set up the component video output for use with a progressive scan-compatible TV.

2 Connect the AUDIO OUTPUT jacks to the corresponding audio inputs on your TV.

You can use the supplied audio/video cable, leaving the yellow video plug disconnected. Make sure you match up the left and right outputs with their corresponding inputs for correct stereo sound.

Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver

If you have a cable box or satellite receiver with a built-in decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on the following page. If you are using a separate decoder box for your cable/satellite TV, set up following the instructions on the next page.

Using the setup on this page you can:

  • Record any channel by selecting it on the cable box, satellite receiver or digital terrestrial receiver.
  • Change channels and set timer recordings on the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+™ system (via the G-LINK™ cable, and after setting up).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver - 1

Important

  • Do not connect this recorder to your TV 'through' your VCR, satellite receiver or other component. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.
  • When using the GUIDE Plus+ system to make a timer recording from an external receiver, make sure that the external receiver is switched on.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

1 Connect RF antenna cables as shown.

See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 for more on RF antenna connections, including from this recorder to your TV.

2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV.

This enables you to watch discs.

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your cable box/satellite receiver.

This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.

This enables you to control the tuner in the external receiver using the GUIDE Plus+TM system.

Position the IR transmitter end of the G-LINK™ cable so that the IR receiver on your cable/satellite receiver will pick up the control signals (see diagram).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™ jack. - 1

See the manual that came with your cable/satellite receiver if you're not sure where the IR receiver is on the front panel. Alternatively, experiment with the remote control, operating it from very close range until you find the place where the receiver responds.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Plug the supplied G-LINK™ cable to the G-LINK™ jack. - 2

Tip

  • This recorder has a 'through' function which allows you to record a TV program from the built-in TV tuner in this recorder while watching a video playing on your VCR (To use this feature when the recorder is in standby, Power Save must be set to Off—see Power Save on page 129).

Connecting an external decoder box (1)

If you have an external, dedicated decoder box for your satellite or cable TV system, use the setup described on this page. See the previous page for how to connect the G-LINK™ cable.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting an external decoder box (1) - 1

Important

  • Do not connect your decoder box directly to this recorder.
  • Information from the decoder (for example, relating to pay TV services), is only viewable when this recorder is off (in standby).
  • For timer recording to work properly on this recorder, the VCR/satellite receiver/cable box must also be switched on during recording.
  • It is not possible to watch one TV program and record another using this setup.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

1 Connect the cable from the antenna/cable TV outlet to the antenna input on your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect your decoder to your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box.

See the manual for your decoder box for more detailed instructions.

3 Use a SCART cable to connect your VCR/satellite receiver/cable box to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector on this recorder.
4 Use a SCART cable to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to your TV.

Connecting an external decoder box (2)

If you only have a decoder, connect it to this recorder and your TV as shown on this page.

Using the setup on this page you can:

  • Record scrambled channels received using the recorder's built-in analog TV tuner.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting an external decoder box (2) - 1

Important

  • Do not connect this recorder 'through' your VCR, satellite receiver or cable box. Always connect each component directly to your TV or AV amplifier/receiver.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

1 Connect your TV antenna to the recorder and TV.
See Connecting a TV antenna on page 47 for details.
2 Use a SCART cable (not supplied) to connect the AV1(RGB)-TV AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your TV.

This enables you to watch discs.

3 Use another SCART cable to connect the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) AV connector to a SCART AV connector on your decoder box.

This enables you to record scrambled TV channels.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 2

Note

1 In order to use this setup, you will need to make the following settings from the Initial Setup menu:
- Set the AV2/L1 In setting to Decoder from the Initial Setup menu (see AV2/L1 /n on page 132).
- From the Manual CH Setting screen, set the Decoder setting for the scrambled channels to On (see Manual CH Setting on page 131).

Connecting using HDMI

If you have an HDMI or DVI-equipped monitor or display, you can connect it to this recorder using an HDMI cable (not supplied).

The HDMI connector outputs uncompressed digital video, as well as almost every kind of digital audio.

1 Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI-compatible monitor.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI-compatible monitor. - 1

  • The arrow on the cable connector body should be face down for correct alignment with the connector on the recorder.

When connected to an HDMI component or HDCP-compatible DVI component, the HDMI indicator lights. HDMI setup is generally automatic. There are however settings you can change if you need to. See HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected) on page 137 for more information. Note that the HDMI settings remain in effect until you change them, or connect a new HDMI component.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Use an HDMI cable to connect the HDMI OUT connector on this recorder to an HDMI connector on an HDMI-compatible monitor. - 2

Important

  • An HDMI connection can only be made with DVI-equipped components compatible with both DVI and High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP). If you choose to connect to a DVI connector, you will need a DVI to HDMI adaptor cable. A DVI to HDCP connection, however, does not support audio. Consult your local audio dealer for more information.
  • The HDMI connection is compatible with 32kHz , 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit 2-channel linear PCM signals, as well as Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio bitstream.

  • If your connected component is only compatible with Linear PCM, the signal is output as Linear PCM (DTS audio is not output).

  • If you have connected to a Pioneer plasma display, please select the HDMI setup on the display (refer to the supplied manual for more on this).

About HDMI

HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) supports both video and audio on a single digital connection for use with DVD players and recorders, DTV, set-top boxes, and other AV devices. HDMI was developed to provide the technologies of High Bandwidth Digital Content Protection (HDCP) as well as Digital Visual Interface (DVI) in one specification. HDCP is used to protect digital content transmitted and received by DVI-compliant displays.

HDMI has the capability to support standard, enhanced, or high-definition video plus standard to multi-channel surround-sound audio. HDMI features include uncompressed digital video, a bandwidth of up to 5 gigabits per second (Dual Link), one connector (instead of several cables and connectors), and communication between the AV source and AV devices such as DTVs.

HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI licensing LLC.

Note

1 This unit has been designed to be compliant with HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) version 1.2a and HDCP version 1.1. Depending on the component you have connected, using a DVI connection may result in unreliable signal transfers.
2 The pixel resolution of this recorder's HDMI video output is (according to TV format): NTSC (720 x 480/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080) and PAL (720 x 576/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080). If your display is not compatible with these resolutions the picture may not be correctly reproduced.

Connecting other AV sources

Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting a VCR or analog camcorder - 1

1 Connect a set of audio and video inputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of outputs on this recorder.

This enables you to record from this recorder to your VCR or camcorder.

  • You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection.
  • Alternatively, you can use the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector for audio/video input and output with just one SCART cable.

2 Connect a set of audio and video outputs of your VCR or camcorder to a set of inputs on this recorder.

This enables you to record tapes from your VCR or camcorder.

  • You can use standard video or S-video cables for the video connection.
  • The front panel connections make convenient connections for a camcorder input.

Connecting a DV camcorder

Using the front panel DV IN jack, it is possible to connect a DV camcorder or video deck, or DVD-R/RW recorder and digitally transfer DV tapes or DVD-R/-RW discs to DVD-R/-RW.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting a DV camcorder - 1

Important

  • This jack is for connection to DV equipment only. It is not compatible with digital satellite receivers or D-VHS video decks.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

  • Use a DV cable (not supplied) to connect the DV jack of your DV camcorder/video deck to the front panel DV IN jack of this recorder.

Connecting a USB device

Using the USB ports on the front of the recorder you can connect USB devices such as digital cameras and printers. Please also see the instructions that came with the device you want to connect before using.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting a USB device - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Connecting a USB device - 2

Important

  • Some USB devices may not work with this recorder.
    Devices may not work reliably if connected to this recorder via a USB hub.

JPEG file storage devices

Digital still camera
- Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
- USB memory

The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it.

The Picture Transfer Protocol (PTP) can be used to transfer up to about 4000 files.

WMA/MP3 file storage devices

  • Memory card reader (any type of memory card)
  • USB memory

The Mass Storage Class (MSC) device should be FAT-compatible. Note that if the device is partitioned, this recorder may not recognize it.

Note that although multi-slot card readers can be used, the recorder will only recognize the first card inserted. To read another card, remove all the cards and insert the card to be read again.

Using a USB printer

  • Use a PictBridge-compatible printer.

Plugging in

After checking all the connections, plug in the recorder.

  • Use the supplied power cable to connect this recorder to a power outlet.

Chapter 3

Controls and displays

Front panel

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Front panel - 1

1 STANDBY/ON

Press to switch the recorder on/into standby.

2 Disc tray

3 A.TV indicator

Lights when analog TV is selected.

D.TV indicator

Lights when digital TV is selected.

DivX indicator

Lights during DivX playback. (Copy indicator lights during copying.)

PLTV indicator

Lights during recording started using the Pause Live TV feature.

HDMI indicator

Lights when this recorder is connected to HDMI (HDCP) compatible component.

COPY

Light during copying.

4 △ OPEN/CLOSE

Press to open/close the disc tray.

5 HDD and DVD indicators

Indicator lights blue when the hard disk (HDD) is selected; orange when the DVD drive is selected.

6 HDD/DVD

Press to switch between HDD and DVD for recording and playback.

7 Front panel display

See Display on page 55 for details.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Front panel display - 1

Press to start or restart playback.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Front panel display - 2

Press to stop playback.

10 CH +/-

Use to change channels, skip chapters/tracks, etc.

11 (STOPREC)

Press to stop recording.

12 REC

Press to start recording. Press repeatedly to set the recording time in 30 minute blocks.

13 Front panel inputs

See Front panel connections on page 46 for more information on these.

14 HELP

Press for help on how to use the current GUI screen.

15 A.TV / D.TV

Switches between analog TV antenna input and digital TV antenna input. The A.TV and D.TV indicators show which is selected.

16 INPUT SELECT

Press to change the input to use for recording.

17 ONE TOUCH COPY (page 110)

Press to start One Touch Copy of the currently playing title to DVD or the HDD.

18 PAUSE LIVE TV (page 83)

Press to start recording the current TV channel, but with playback paused, effectively pausing the broadcast.

Display

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Display - 1

1 Lights during playback; blinks when playback is paused.
2 Lights when copying.
3 Lights during recording; blinks when recording is paused.
4 (page 70) Lights when a timer recording has been set. (Indicator blinks if the timer has been set to DVD but there isn't a recordable disc loaded, or the timer has been set to record to the HDD but the HDD is not recordable.)

NTSC Lights when the video output signal format is NTSC.

1.2 (page 133) Indicates which channels of a bilingual broadcast are recorded.

P (page 132) Lights when the component video output is set to progressive scan (except in some cases when a component is connected using HDMI).

VPS/PDC (page 70) Lights when receiving a VPS/PDC broadcast during a VPS/PDC-enabled timer recording.

5 Recording quality indicators (page 82)

XP Lights when the recording mode is set to XP (best quality).

SP Lights when the recording mode is set to SP (standard play).

LP / SLP Lights when the recording mode is set to LP (long play) or SLP (super-long play).

EP/SEP Lights when the recording mode is set to EP (extended play) or SEP (super-extended play).

MN Lights when the recording mode is set to MN (manual recording level) mode.

6 Character display

7 R/RW Lights when a recordable DVD-R or DVD-RW disc is loaded.

8 PL (page 101) Lights when a VR mode disc is loaded and the recorder is in Play List mode.

23 (page 138) Shows the remote control mode (if nothing is displayed, the remote control mode is 1).

V Lights when an unfinalized Video mode disc is loaded.

Chapter 4 Getting started

Switching on and setting up

When you switch the recorder on for the first time, you can make several basic settings using the Setup Navigator feature. This takes you through setting the clock, the internal TV tuner and the video output.

If you're using the recorder for the first time, we strongly recommend you use the Setup Navigator before starting to use the recorder.

1 Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Switch on your TV and set the video input to this recorder. - 1

Switch on the recorder.

When you switch on for the first time, your TV should display the Setup Navigator screen (If the Setup Navigator doesn't appear, you can also access it from the Initial Setup menu; see page 129).

  • If this recorder is connected to a compatible TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable, the recorder will take a few seconds to download country, TV screen size and language information. (Check the manual that came with your TV for compatibility information.)

3 Choose a language (then press ENTER).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choose a language (then press ENTER). - 1

Choose a language (then press ENTER).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choose a language (then press ENTER). - 1

4 ENTER Start the Setup Navigator.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - ENTER Start the Setup Navigator. - 1

  • If you don't want to use the Setup Navigator, press ↓ to select Cancel, then press ENTER to exit the Setup Navigator.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - ENTER Start the Setup Navigator. - 2

Select an Aerial Power setting for the jintegraluner.

  • On: power is always supplied to the connected aerial, whether the recorder is on or in standby.
  • Auto: power is only supplied when this recorder is on.
  • Off: power is never supplied to the aerial.

6 Select 'Auto Scan' to start scanning for D.TV channels.

  • Select Do not set if you want to skip D.TV channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example), then skip to step 8 below.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Auto Scan' to start scanning for D.TV channels. - 1

Select your country.

The recorder starts scanning for new channels. After the scan is complete the recorder will let you know how many new channels were found.

  • The country setting will apply to both the digital and analog TV tuners.
  • The clock will also be set automatically here if D.TV channels are found.
  • If no new channels were found a message appears asking if you want to scan again. Check the aerial connection before selecting Yes. (If you select No, skip to step 8 below.)

8 Select the analog TV (A.TV) Auto Channel Setting ('Auto Scan' or 'Download from TV'), or 'Do not set'.

Auto Channel Setting

Auto Scan

Download from TV

Do not Set

  • Select Do not set if you want to skip channel setup (because they have already been set up, for example).
  • You can only use the Download from TV feature if this recorder is connected to your TV using a fully-wired 21-pin SCART cable via the AV1(RGB)-TV connector, and if your TV supports this function (check your TV's instruction manual for more details).

Note

If the recorder does not accept the On or Auto setting (the highlight jumps back to Off), check that the antenna is properly connected and that it is not shorted, then try making the setting again.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Note - 1

Select your country.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select your country. - 1

- Auto-tuning channels

The Auto Scan option automatically scans and sets the channel presets.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Auto-tuning channels - 1

- Downloading channels from your TV

Use the Download from TV option to download all the channels that your TV is tuned to.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Downloading channels from your TV - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Downloading channels from your TV - 2

Select 'Auto' for automatic time setting, I to set the clock manually.

If the clock was already set from a D.TV channel in step 6, this step is skipped.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Downloading channels from your TV - 3

- Auto clock setting

Some TV channels broadcast time signals together with the program. This recorder can use these signals to set the clock automatically.

Set 'Clock Set CH' to the channel preset number that broadcasts a time signal, then move the cursor down to 'Start' and press ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Auto clock setting - 1

The recorder takes a short while to set the time. After you see that it's set, select Next to proceed.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - Auto clock setting - 2

If the time could not be set automatically, press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the previous screen and select Manual.

- Manual clock setting

If no stations in your area are broadcasting time signals, you can set the clock manually.

Use the / buttons to set your time zone.

You can set this by selecting a city or a time relative to GMT.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Use the / buttons to set your time zone. - 1

Press then use the / buttons to select 'On' or 'Off' for summer time, then press ENTER.

Select On if you are currently using summer time.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press  then use the / buttons to select 'On' or 'Off' for summer time, then press ENTER. - 1

Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set the date (day/month/year) and time, then press ENTER to make all the settings. - 1

  • Use the / buttons to change the value in the highlighted field.
  • Use the / buttons to move from one field to another.
  • You can go back to the previous screen at anytime in the Setup Navigator by pressing RETURN/EXIT.

10

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 10 - 1

Select the EPG (Electronic Program Guide)

type to use.

GUIDE Plus+: Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG (see also Setting up the GUIDE Plus ^+ system on page 59 and Using the GUIDE Plus ^+ electronic program guide on page 62).
- Digital EPG: Use the SI EPG (program information broadcast together with digital channels).
- If no channels were found when scanning for digital TV channels then this screen does not appear and the EPG is set according to the country set in step 7 above.

11 Select the TV screen type, 'Wide (16:9)' or 'Standard (4:3)'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - type to use. - 1

12 Select whether or not your TV is compatible with progressive scan video.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - type to use. - 2

  • Note that progressive scan video is only output through the AV1(RGB)-TV connector and the component video outputs.

13 ENTER Press to continue after reading the HDD caution.

In the event of HDI failure, recordings may be recorded in the same heartbeat/recording may not be possible.

As recordings might be lost in case of a HOD failure, we recommend to use the HOD only when the patient is not able to speak.

Please copy recordings you want to keep to recordable DVD.

Press ENTER to continue.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - type to use. - 3

14 Select 'Finish Setup' to exit the Setup Navigator, or 'Go Back' if you want to start again.

Setup is complete!

Enjoy using your DVD recorder!

Finish Setup

Go Back

That completes basic setup using the Setup Navigator.

  • If there are blank channels with no station, you can set these to skip using the manual channel setting. See Manual CH Setting on page 131.

For users receiving digital broadcast services

This unit can set its internal clock automatically from digital broadcasts. However, depending on the broadcaster, the clock information received may not be accurate.

Use the following procedure (while the recorder is not recording) to set the clock manually.

1 HOME MENU Press HOME MENU.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - For users receiving digital broadcast services - 1

Select 'Initial Setup' > 'Basic' > 'Clock

3 Highlight the time setting.
4 ENTER Press ENTER to display the manual clock setting screen.
5 Set the correct time.

Return to automatic clock setting

  • To return to the automatic clock setting, follow the instructions for 'Replace Channels' (page 130).

Setting up the GUIDE Plus+TM system

This section is only applicable if you chose to use the GUIDE Plus+ system as the EPG type in step 10 of the Setup Navigator above.

The GUIDE Plus ^+ system is a free, interactive onscreen television programming guide. The system offers program listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, search by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more.

For the GUIDE Plus+ system to function correctly, it is important that you set the language and country correctly in the Setup Navigator, and that you have performed a scan for available channels, as these are all used by the GUIDE Plus+ system. If any of these things are not yet set, please run the Setup Navigator first (see Switching on and setting up on page 56).

TV listings information is received via 'host channels'. In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus+ system and 'download' the TV listings information. The initial download can take up to 24 hours, but once this is done, all future updates are automatic.

1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. - 1

The language and country settings are already set to whatever you selected in the Setup Navigator.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. - 2
Highlight 'Postal Code'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. - 3

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. - 4
3 Enter your postal code.

The system uses your postal code to identify which TV listings data is correct for the area in which you live, so it is important that you enter it correctly.

4 If you are using an external receiver (such as a satellite receiver) with the supplied G-LINK cable, complete this step, otherwise jump to step 5 below.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ setup menu. - 5

  • See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 49 for more on using the supplied G-LINK cable.
  • Select External Receiver 1, 2 or 3, then press ENTER. (If you have just one external receiver, use External Receiver 1. You can add further receivers in 2 and 3 if you need to.)

After pressing ENTER:

  • Select your reception method (Terrestrial, Cable or Satellite).
  • Select your provider (if applicable).
  • Select the brand of your external receiver.
  • Identify which input your external receiver is connected to.

After completing these steps the recorder will try and communicate with your external receiver and change the channel via the G-LINK cable. If the channel was successfully changed, select Yes to confirm.

If the channel did not change, select No. The GUIDE Plus ^+ system will try other codes assigned to your external receiver. If none of the codes changes the channel successfully, tune your external receiver to the host channel for your country (refer to step 5 below) and leave it on overnight. The recorder needs to be in standby; it will wake up automatically and download new codes from the host channel. The next day, try this setup process again:

  • Press GUIDE to display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.
  • Press to highlight the Menu bar, then use to reach the Setup area and select Setup.
  • Continue setting up from the start of this step again. If your external receiver still doesn't respond to the GLINK controller, please call customer support and report the brand and model of your external receiver.

See also GUIDE Plus + FAQ and troubleshooting on page 73.

5 Identify the host channel for your country.

The TV listings information available in the GUIDE Plus+ system is distributed throughout Europe by selected broadcasters called host channels. It is important that the host (analog) channel for your country is correctly identified in order to receive listings information (EPG download).

Follow A, B or C below depending on your setup:

A If you are not using an external receiver, this recorder will automatically scan all channels for the host channel:
- Leave the recorder in standby overnight (do not leave it switched on).
B If you are using an external receiver, you need to identify the host channel from the table below:

Country/ RegionHost channelsComments
AustriaEurosport
BelgiumRTL-TVI Music Factory (TMF)TMF will be switched off in the near future.
FranceCanal +Analog only
GermanyEurosport
ItalyMTVAnalog only
NetherlandsMusic Factory (TMF), EurosportTMF will be switched off in the near future.
SpainTele 5Analog only
SwitzerlandEurosport
UKITV, EurosportITV is analog only. Use Eurosport if you are a SKY subscriber and you no longer have an analog terrestrial antenna.
  • Tune your external receiver to the appropriate host channel and leave the receiver on and the recorder in standby overnight.

C If you use both an external receiver and this recorder as sources, follow the instructions above for setting up without an external receiver. Only if this is unsuccessful try the external receiver method.

About EPG download

  • EPG data can only be received when the recorder is in standby. (When not using the recorder, therefore, please switch it into standby.) If you're using an external receiver, leave this on when EPG data is downloading.
  • If you cannot receive any of the host channels (see the above table) then you won't be able to use the GUIDE Plus+ system. In this case do not set the postal code (or set Country to Other) in the GUIDE Plus+ setup screen. (When GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, set the postal code again.) If digital broadcasts start in your area, please set the EPG Type Select setting in the Initial Setup menu to Digital EPG.
  • Even if you can't use the EPG functions where you live, you can still set ShowView timer recordings and manual recordings — see Setting a manual recording on page 70.
  • The front panel display shows EPG when receiving data. If you power on the recorder during an EPG download, the download is canceled.
  • EPG data may be received several times a day. All updates are automatic.
  • When downloading EPG data, the recorder may sound as though it is on. This is normal.

Checking the downloaded data the following day

1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. - 1

You should see a grid filled with channel logos and TV listings information. Use the / buttons to review the list. If you notice that there are channels missing, or that there are channels in the list that you don't get, go to the Editor screen:

  • Press ↑ repeatedly until the Menu bar is highlighted.

  • Press until Editor is highlighted. The main area of the screen now shows a list of channels. Those that are turned ON are displayed in the grid; those that are OFF are hidden. Use the / / / buttons to move down the list and turn channels ON or OFF as necessary.

  • For any channel that you turn ON, the GUIDE Plus+ system will need to know how it is received (the source) and on which program number. The source may be the built-in tuner of this recorder, or an external receiver. The program number is the number on which the channel can be found on its receiving device/source. The entry in the Editor screen must match this number for correct recording of that channel.
  • The above is especially important for the 'host channel'. Please make sure that the host channel is always switched ON.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1GUIDE Display the GUIDE Plus+ screen. - 2

2 Change the program numbers as you like.

Changing the program numbers allows you to decide the order in which the channels change when stepping through them sequentially. You can do this to group certain channels together, for example.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Change the program numbers as you like. - 1

3 When you're done, press the BLUE Action button (Home) to get back to the GUIDE Plus+ home screen.

  • You can find detailed information on using the GUIDE Plus+ system in the following chapter.

Chapter 5

Using the GUIDE Plus+™ electronic program guide

This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup menu) is set to GUIDE Plus+.

The GUIDE Plus+ system

The GUIDE Plus+ system* is a free, interactive on-screen television programming guide. The system provides program listings for all major channels, one-touch recording, searching by genre, recommendations according to your profile and more. The GUIDE Plus+ system is a convenient way to find out what's on right now or during the coming week, by channel or by genre. The GUIDE Plus+ system also allows you to automatically set your viewing and recording selections quickly and easily.

In order to receive the correct TV listings information for your country or region you need to set up the GUIDE Plus ^+ system and 'download' the TV listings information. If you haven't already done this, please turn to Setting up the GUIDE Plus ^+ system on page 59 before proceeding.

*GUIDE Plus+, SHOWView,VIDEO Plus+, G-LINK are (1) registered trademarks or trademarks of, (2) manufactured under license from and (3) subject of various international patents and patent applications owned by, or licensed to, Gemstar-TV Guide International, Inc. and/or its related affiliates.

GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES ARE NOT IN ANY WAY LIABLE FOR THE ACCURACY OF THE PROGRAM SCHEDULE INFORMATION PROVIDED BY THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM. IN NO EVENT SHALL GEMSTAR-TV GUIDE INTERNATIONAL, INC. AND/OR ITS RELATED AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY AMOUNTS REPRESENTING LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE PROVISION OR USE OF ANY INFORMATION, EQUIPMENT, OR SERVICES RELATING TO THE GUIDE PLUS+ SYSTEM.

Using the GUIDE Plus+ system

All the various features and areas are colour-coded for ease of navigation. All screens (with the exception of some setup screens) have the following common elements:

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the GUIDE Plus+ system - 1

1 Video window - Allows you to continue watching the current program while using the GUIDE Plus+ system.
2 Information panels - Display program promotions or instructions on the GUIDE Plus+ system.
3 Action bar - Colour-coded Action buttons change function depending on the area.
4 Information box - Shows short program descriptions or help menus.
5 Menu bar - Gives access to the various areas of the GUIDE Plus+ system.
6 Grid - Shows TV listings information for the next seven days by channel and time.

GUIDE Plus+ navigation

The table below shows a summary of the remote buttons you'll use to navigate the GUIDE Plus+ system.

KeyWhat it does
●RECPress to set or cancel One Button Recording.
GUIDEPress to display the GUIDE Plus+screen (also use to exit).
↑/↓/←/→Use to navigate screens (highlight an item).
RED, GREEN,YELLOW, BLUEAction buttons that change functionality depending on the Area.
MENUPress to jump directly to the Menu bar.
TIMER RECPress to go directly to the Schedule area.
INFOPress to display extended information for the current program.
ENTERPress to confirm a selection or to leave the GUIDE Plus+screen.
Number buttonsUse for numeric entry.
I←PREV/NEXTPress to select the previous/next page of information (in the grid, for example).
←/→Press to select the previous/next day.

One-Button-Record

The RED Action button (Record) is visible anytime you can highlight a program title, including from the Grid, after a search, or in your recommendations in the My TV area.

The program name, date, channel, recording start and end times are all set automatically when you set a timer recording using One-Button-Record.

If you need to, you can edit the settings at any time before the recording is due to start (see Editing a scheduled recording on page 67).

1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - One-Button-Record - 1
Highlight a program title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - One-Button-Record - 2

2 Press the RED Action button (Record).

The program is now set for recording. When the program is due to start, the recorder will switch to the correct channel and start recording1.

  • You can also use the REC button to set the recording.
  • You can review the shows you have set to record in the Schedule Area (see also The Schedule Area on page 67).

Note

1 Recording times set using the GUIDE Plus ^+ system do not automatically change to reflect any changes that may occur in the program broadcast schedules.

Lock / Unlock video window

When you enter the GUIDE Plus+ system, the channel you were watching remains visible in the video window. The date stamp above the window lets you know the channel, date and time.

The default setting for this window is 'locked', as indicated by a closed padlock icon above the video window. When locked, the video window always shows the channel you were previously watching as you move up and down through the listings grid.

If you prefer, you can unlock the video window so that as you highlight different channels in the listings grid, that channel is shown in the video window.

1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1 - 1
Highlight a channel logo.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 1 - 2

Channel logos are displayed to the left of program titles.

2 Press the RED Action button (Unlock).

The padlock icon above the video window becomes unlocked. It remains unlocked for the remainder of your current TV viewing session.

If you want to lock the video window again, follow the same procedure. The RED Action button will now act as Lock.

Channel mosaic screen

You can switch the display style of channels in the Grid Area, Schedule Area or My TV Area from a list to a mosaic of channel icons by pressing the YELLOW Action button. Select the channel icon you want using the cursor buttons, then press ENTER to return to the previous screen on that channel.

Areas

The GUIDE Plus+ ^TM system consists of seven Areas. All Areas can be accessed from the Menu bar.

  • Grid - The GUIDE Plus+ system Home Area. Displays TV listings information for the next seven days by time and channel.
  • Search - Search for TV programs by category (e.g., Sport), subcategory (e.g., Football) or keyword.
  • My TV - Set up a profile and receive recommendations according to your preferences.
  • Schedule - Show all scheduled recordings.
  • Info - Area for additional information, such as weather (not available in all regions).
  • Editor - Change channel settings.
  • Setup - Setup the GUIDE Plus+™ system.

The Grid Area

The Grid is the main TV listings screen of the GUIDE Plus+ system and is the first screen that you see when you press GUIDE.You can see TV listings for the next seven days, starting with the current day.

When you highlight a program in the Grid, you can see information about it in the Information Box, including title, synopsis, channel, source, time and length. If there is an i symbol in the Information Box, it means that there is an extended synopsis available. Press the INFO button to see it.

In some countries, you can also see a rating for a particular program (mostly movies). These ratings are provided by local partners, such as TV magazines.

From the Grid Area you can:

View and scroll through program listings
- Read program synopsis
- Tune to a program that's currently showing1
- Set a program to record
- Lock or unlock the video window.
- Access Information panels.

Browsing the Grid

Use the following remote buttons to browse the grid:

/ / / (cursor buttons) - Navigate the Grid

PREV/ NEXT - Previous / next page

  • Previous / next day

BLUE Action button - Return to the current time/date in the Grid.

ENTER - Press on the current selection to exit the GUIDE Plus+ system and start watching the program.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Browsing the Grid - 1

Note

If you're using an external tuner (satellite tuner, for example), there will be a short delay of a couple of seconds while it tunes to the channel. This is normal.

The Search Area

From the Search Area you can:

Search by category
Search by subcategory
Search by keyword
- Read program synopsis
- Tune to a program that's currently showing
- Set a program to record
- Access Information panels.

Searching

You can search for programs by category, subcategory or by keyword (My Choice). Categories for searching include Movies (purple), Sport (green), Children (blue) and Others (teal). In some countries there is a further subcategory available called 'Tip of the Day'. These are programs recommended by a local partner, such as a TV magazine.

1 Select 'Search' from the Menu bar.

2 Select a category and a subcategory.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a category and a subcategory. - 1

  • If you choose All as the subcategory, all programs in the category you selected will show up in the search results.

The search results are shown sorted by time and date.

  • If no search results are displayed, it means there are no programs for the current day that match your search criteria.

In addition to the standard categories, you can also set your own keywords.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using My Choice keywords for a search - 1
Access My Choice.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using My Choice keywords for a search - 2

2 Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword. - 1
Enter a keyword to appear in the menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the YELLOW Action button to add a keyword. - 2

When you're finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue.

  • You can delete or edit keywords using the RED and GREEN Action buttons.
  • When you have set more than two keywords, an All subcategory automatically appears which allows you to search for all your keywords.

My TV Area

The My TV Area allows you to set up a personal profile. You can define a profile by channels, themes and/or keywords. As soon as a personal profile has been set, the GUIDE Plus+ system continuously scans the TV listings for the next seven days. Whenever you access the My TV Area, a list of programs matching your profile appears. From the My TV Area you can:

  • Set up a profile by channel, theme and/or keyword.
  • Edit and delete profiles.
  • Read program synopsis
  • Tune to a program that's currently showing
  • Set a program to record
  • Access Information panels.

Setting up a profile

You can set up a profile with any combination of up to 16 channels, four categories and 16 keywords.

1 Select 'My TV' from the Menu bar.
2 Press the YELLOW Action button to set a profile.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Setting up a profile - 1
Channels is now highlighted.

3 To add a channel to your profile, press the YELLOW Action button.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Setting up a profile - 2

Select a channel from the mosaic of channel icons and press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to 16 channels.
4 To add a theme to your profile, highlight 'Themes' and press the YELLOW Action button.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Setting up a profile - 3
Select a theme from the Search Area categories and press ENTER. Repeat this step to add up to four categories.

5 To add a keyword to your profile, highlight 'Keywords' and press the YELLOW Action button.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - To add a keyword to your profile, highlight 'Keywords' and press the YELLOW Action button. - 1

Use the / / / buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the on-screen keyboard. When you're finished, press the GREEN Action button to exit and continue.

6 Press ENTER to activate your profile.

  • You can add up to 16 keywords by repeating step 5.
  • You can edit or delete your profile using the RED and GREEN Action buttons.

The Schedule Area

The Schedule Area is where you can set, see, edit and delete scheduled (timer) recordings.

From the Schedule Area you can:

  • Edit or delete a One-Button-Recording.
  • Set, edit or delete a ShowView recording.
  • Set, edit or delete a manual recording.

Editing a scheduled recording

You can edit any parameter in a scheduled recording, or delete it if you no longer require it.

1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. - 1

If you only want to edit the recording quality, frequency, destination, timing or genre settings, skip to step 6 below.

2 Press the GREEN Action button (Edit).

3 Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the recording date, start time, end time and channel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Use the cursor and number buttons to edit the recording date, start time, end time and channel. - 1

Use the / buttons or the number buttons to edit.

Press the GREEN Action button to go to continue, or the RED Action button to go back.

4 Enter a name for the scheduled recording.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Enter a name for the scheduled recording. - 1

Use the / / / buttons followed by ENTER to select characters from the on-screen keyboard.

After entering the whole name, press the GREEN Action button to continue.

5 Highlight the right recording tile.

6 Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change the recording quality.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the RED Action button (Quality) to change the recording quality. - 1

Select from AUTO, XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP or MN (if manual recording is set to On).

7 Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to change the recording frequency.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the GREEN Action button (Frequency) to change the recording frequency. - 1

Select from the various options for one-time, daily and weekly recordings.

8 Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to select the recording destination.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press YELLOW Action button (Destination) to select the recording destination. - 1

Select from DVD, HDD or HDDr (Auto Replace Recording)2.

  • Auto Replace Recording is only available as an option with regular daily or weekly recordings.

Note

1 This mode maximizes the recording quality to fit on to a single DVD disc. Can also be used when recording to HDD.

2 For a DVD timer recording, if Optimized Rec (see Optimized Rec on page 135) is set to On (and VPS/PDC is off), the recorder will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on the disc. If the recording will not fit onto the disc even on MN1 recording quality then the Recovery Recording feature will automatically make the recording to the HDD instead.

If there is very little free space left on the HDD, an Auto Replace Recording may not complete successfully.

  • If the HDD is being used for playback or high-speed copying when an Auto Replace Recording is due to start, the new timer recording will not replace the old one. However, the next time the timer recording starts, both of the older two programs will be erased.

9 Press to access the extended recording options:

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press  to access the extended recording options: - 1

  • If you want to record to a particular HDD genre, use the YELLOW Action button (Genre) to select one.
  • Use the GREEN Action button (Timing) to add extra time to the end of the recording (+0, +10, +20, +30 or VPS/PDC ^1 ( V - P ).
  • Press to display the standard recording options again.

Deleting a scheduled recording

1 Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the left tile of a scheduled recording. - 1

2 Press the RED Action button (Delete).

The scheduled event is deleted.

Setting a ShowView™ recording

1 Select 'Schedule' from the Menu bar.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Schedule' from the Menu bar. - 1

2 Press the RED Action button (ShowView).

3 Use the number buttons to enter a ShowView programming number.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Use the number buttons to enter a ShowView programming number. - 1

  • If you live in an area not yet covered by the GUIDE Plus+ system you may also have to input a channel number. Follow the on-screen display to do this.

4 Press ENTER to confirm.

Note

  1. If you set the timer recording to use VPS/PDC, you must switch the recorder into standby before the timer recording is due to start for it to work correctly. For non-VPS/PDC timer recordings there is no need to switch the recorder into standby.
  2. Optimized Recording will not work if VPS/PDC is on.
  3. Up to 8 timer recordings can be set with VPS/PDC.
    VPS/PDC cannot be set for recordings made from digital broadcasts or an external input, or when the recording mode is set to AUTO

Setting a manual recording

1 Select 'Schedule' from the Menu bar.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Schedule' from the Menu bar. - 1

2 Press the GREEN Action button (Manual).

3 Use the number and / / / buttons to enter the recording date, then press the GREEN Action button (Next).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the GREEN Action button (Manual). - 1

4 In the same way, enter the recording start time, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm.
5 Enter the recording end time in the same way, followed by the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm.

6 Use the number buttons to enter a channel number, then press the GREEN Action button (Next) to confirm.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press the GREEN Action button (Manual). - 2

Alternatively, you can press the YELLOW Action button (Mosaic) and use the / / buttons to select a channel from the mosaic, followed by ENTER.

About timer recording

Using the timer recording features you can program up to 32 timer recordings up to a month in advance. Timer recording programs can be set to record just once, every day, or every week.

You can set the recording quality for your timer recording in the same way as for a regular recording, but with the added option of an AUTO mode, which maximizes the recording quality for the space available on the disc (if recording to DVD), or to fit on to a blank DVD disc (if recording to the HDD).

You can set timer recordings to record to a recordable DVD or to the hard disk drive. For regular (daily or weekly) HDD timer recordings that you don't need to keep, you can use the Auto Replace Recording feature to automatically replace the previous timer recording with the new one. Note that when you use this feature, the previous recording made on that timer program will be replaced by the next one, regardless of whether you have watched it yet or not.

You can also set the recorder so that it will adjust the recording quality to try and fit the recording on to the disc if it would not otherwise fit at the recording quality you set (see Optimized Rec on page 135 for more on this).

Finally, if you set a timer recording to record to DVD but there isn't a recordable DVD loaded at the time of the recording, the Recovery Recording feature will automatically record the program to the HDD for you.

This recorder is compatible with VPS (Video Programming System) and PDC (Program Delivery Control) systems used by many analog TV stations to ensure that a timer recording catches the whole program even when the program is not running to schedule. Up to eight timer programs can be set with VPS/PDC on.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - About timer recording - 1

Important

  • A timer recording can't be set if there are already 32 timer programs waiting to be recorded.
  • Timer recording will not start if:
  • The recorder is already recording.
  • A disc is being initialized, finalized or unfinalized.
  • Timer recording will start when the operation preventing timer recording has finished.
  • The timer indicator (Θ) lights in the front panel display when the timer is active. If the indicator is blinking it means that (for a DVD timer recording) there is no disc loaded, or the disc loaded is not recordable (for an HDD timer recording it means that the HDD is not recordable).
  • Approximately two minutes before a timer recording is set to start, the recorder will go into timer recording standby. In timer recording standby you cannot use some functions.
  • The maximum length for timer recordings made to the HDD is 24 hours. However, because one title (HDD) is limited to 12 hours, recordings over 12 hours will be spread over two titles. Note that there will be a break in the recording of a few seconds between titles.
    VPS/PDC works only with analog stations; it does not work with digital TV stations.
    VPS/PDC may not work with all broadcast stations in your country/area. Check with the stations for compatibility.
  • The hours between 3:00 and 5:00 in the morning are used by the GUIDE Plus+ system to download program information. During these times, VPS/PDC may not work reliably; leave VPS/PDC off if you set a timer recording for these times.

Extending a timer recording in progress

You can extend a timer recording beyond the programmed end time. This can be useful if a broadcast program overruns, for example.

Canceling or extending the timer

1 REC Press and hold for three seconds during a timer recording.

Recording continues, but the timer indicator disappears from the front panel display indicating that the timer has been canceled.

REC 2 Press repeatedly to extend recording in 30 minute blocks.

Stopping a timer recording

STOPREC

1 Press during a timer recording.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Stopping a timer recording - 1

Select 'Yes' to confirm.

Preventing use of the recorder before a timer recording (child lock)

You can make all the front panel and remote control buttons inoperative using the child lock feature. This is useful when you set a timer recording and want to make sure that the timer settings are not changed before recording has finished.

RECORDER

1 If the recorder is on, switch it into standby.

2 [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls.

The front panel display briefly shows LOCK. If any buttons are pressed on the remote or front panel, LOCK is briefly displayed again.

  • To unlock the recorder, press and hold STOP on the front panel (while the recorder is stopped) for three seconds until the display shows UNLOCK.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - [Front panel] Press and hold for three seconds to lock the controls. - 1

Frequently Asked Questions

Even though the timer is set, the recorder doesn't start recording!

Check that the disc loaded or HDD is recordable, not locked (see Lock Disc on page 124), and that there are fewer than 99/999 titles already on the DVD/HDD.

The recorder won't let me enter a timer program! Why not?

You can't enter a timer program if the clock isn't set.

  • What happens when two or more timer programs overlap?

Basically, the program with the earlier recording start time has priority. However, the recorder will start recording the program with the later start time after the earlier program is finished. If two programs have the same times (but different channels, for example), the program set most recently takes priority.

If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are programmed to start at the same time, then the program that actually starts first takes priority.

The Info Area

This area is reserved for additional information such as news, weather reports, stock quotes, and so on, and varies by region. (Note that this feature is not available in all countries/regions.)

The Editor Area

The Editor Area is the central location for you to manage your channels. Any changes you make here will affect what is displayed in the Grid Area. The Editor Area is mainly used when setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system to make any manual changes as necessary.

You can also use the Editor Area if new channels become available in your area, or if you change from cable to satellite, say, or move house.

From the Editor Area you can:

  • Display/hide channels in the grid (switch the channel on/off).
  • Select a channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, Ext. Rec. 2, etc.).
  • Enter a channel program number.

Switching a channel on/off

You can choose whether or not to display a channel in the Grid Area by switching the channel on or off in the Editor Area.

1 Select 'Editor' from the Menu bar.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Editor' from the Menu bar. - 1

2 Highlight the left channel tile of the channel you want to switch on or off.
3 Press the RED Action button to switch the channel on or off.

Changing the source and program number

1 Select 'Editor' from the Menu bar.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Editor' from the Menu bar. - 1

2 Highlight the right channel tile of the channel you want to make a change to.
3 Press the RED Action button to change the channel source, or the GREEN Action button to enter a program number.

Each press of the RED Action button changes the channel source (A.TV, D.TV, Ext. Rec. 1, etc.). To set a program number, use the number buttons to enter a program number then press ENTER (When set to A.TV or D.TV, make sure that the program number matches the preset number of this recorder for what you want to record).

The Setup Area

The Setup Area is where you can set up the GUIDE Plus+ system for your particular region, TV reception conditions, and so on.

Making changes to your GUIDE Plus+ setup

1 Select 'Setup' from the Menu bar.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Setup' from the Menu bar. - 1

2 Highlight the part you want to change.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the part you want to change. - 1

You can change the Language, Country, Postal Code1 and the External Receiver settings.

3 Press ENTER to confirm.

Manual Host Channel setup

The GUIDE Plus+ system will automatically identify your Host Channel as soon as the recorder is put into standby for the first time. See the table on page 60 for a list of all the European Host Channels.

If you know your Host Channel details (source and program number) or if the automatic identification did not provide the expected result, you can identify your Host Channel manually. Select Host Channel Setup in the Setup area and follow the instructions on the TV. Select the correct source (e.g., internal tuner or external receiver) and enter the respective program number (e.g., if you have to press 9 on the remote to watch your Host Channel, enter 9 as the program number). When you next switch the recorder into standby the GUIDE Plus+ system will complete the Host Channel setup.

You can reset the Host Channel settings at any time back to the default setting of automatic. Please be aware that resetting the Host Channel will erase all TV listings data.

GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting

This FAQ covers only a few questions. For a complete list please consult the GUIDE Plus+ website at: www.europe.guidelplus.com

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - GUIDE Plus+ FAQ and troubleshooting - 1

FAQ

  • When I tried setting up my external receiver I could not get any of the attempts to work, what should I do? A: There could be several reasons why your external receiver could not be controlled.

  • The connections could be wrong. Make sure that the G-LINK cable is connected to the G-LINK connector on the recorder and the IR blaster is in front of the external receiver, pointing towards the IR receiver of your external receiver. See Connecting to a cable box or satellite receiver on page 49.

  • The code that is listed under your brand could be wrong. Please try other codes for your brand under satellite, cable or terrestrial. Go to the Setup Area and choose one of the three options (cable, satellite or terrestrial) that you have not already tried. Follow the on-screen prompts to make sure that the GUIDE Plus+ system can change channels on your external receiver. If it does not work, repeat the process, choosing different reception and external receiver combinations until you have tried all the codes for your brand of receiver that are already in the GUIDE Plus+ system. If it still does not work, see below on how to receive new codes overnight.

  • The unit has not yet received new codes. The nightly data downloads frequently include new codes for controlling external receivers. Please tune your external receiver to your local host channel and leave

it on overnight. Switch this recorder into standby. The next morning, please perform the GUIDE Plus+ setup again to see if your external receiver can now be controlled.

  • The external receiver that you use is currently not supported. If, after leaving your external receiver on overnight, and doing the Reception and External Receiver Setup again, it still does not respond, please call Customer Support to report your brand and model.

  • My external receiver was successfully setup. However I have found that when the GUIDE Plus + system has to change to a channel with a 3-digit program number in the external receiver's preset, it does not work. It looks like the GUIDE Plus + system can only send two digits. With the number of channels increasing, the number of digits has increased as well. While older boxes use only 2 digits, newer boxes require up to 4. It is possible that you selected an older code for your brand during set-up. Please access the Setup Area, select External Receiver and repeat the setup for your brand (Note: Every time you see the on-screen question about whether the receiver has changed to a certain channel, the GUIDE Plus + system has sent a different code). Try all the different codes until your GUIDE Plus + system can control your external receiver correctly. If you have no success, try to receive new codes overnight.

  • I used to receive data through my terrestrial antenna or analog cable without a set-top box. Now, I have "upgraded" to a satellite system or to digital cable with external receiver. What should I do to receive data for the GUIDE Plus+ system?

You can try to receive your host channel through your new reception method. If you have problems to receive data we recommend that you keep your analog terrestrial or cable connection only to receive data this way. It is important that you identify your host channel correctly in the Editor Area.

  • After I performed the initial set-up I found that the line-up for all the channels received via the external set top box is incorrect. How do I correct this?

You can change the line-up in the editor according to your preferences. Access the Editor Area. Select the channels that you would like to change. Change the source and preset number according to your preferences.

  • I performed the set-up but after many hours I still have a blank EPG what is going wrong? There are several possibilities:

  • Connections are wrong. See Connecting up on page 46 to double check everything.

  • The initial setup of GUIDE Plus+ was completed incorrectly. Try setting it up again (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+™ system on page 59).

  • Your cabling and setup is OK, but the recorder has not been connected for enough time to receive the TV listings data. Leave the recorder in standby overnight.

  • For external receiver users only: The connections and setup are OK, but the external receiver was not tuned to the correct host channel. Check the list of host channels (see step 5 of Setting up the GUIDE Plus +™ system on page 59) and leave the recorder in standby and the external receiver on overnight tuned to the correct host channel.

  • You live in a country/region where the GUIDE Plus + system is not yet available. Check the list of countries to see if you are in a region that is supported.

  • I used the One-Button-Record feature (red Action button) to set a recording, but I recorded the wrong channel.

If the channel to be recorded is received via the external receiver first make sure that the external receiver was left switched on. Next, in the Editor Area, make sure that the channel to be recorded is correctly set: Access the Editor Area. Check the source and program number of the channel that you wanted to record. Change the source and preset numbers if incorrect.

If you are recording from the recorder's internal tuner (the A.TV or D.TV setting), make sure that the program number is the same as the preset number set on this recorder. If they are different, go to the Editor Area and change the program number to match the recorder's preset number.

  • The TV listings information doesn't update.

The latest TV listings information is automatically downloaded by the recorder overnight. This only happens if the recorder is in standby; if the recorder is left on, it will not download. When not using the recorder, please switch it into standby.

Data downloads can take several hours. The front panel display shows EPG when downloading. If you switch the recorder on while EPG is displayed, the download will be canceled.

  • The GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in my area, but when I switch the recorder into standby, after a while the front panel display shows EPG. Can I stop this from happening?

If the GUIDE Plus+ system is not supported in your area, please do not set the postal code in the GUIDE Plus+ setup (see Setting up the GUIDE Plus+ system on page 59). When the GUIDE Plus+ service starts in your area, please set the postal code again.

  • The automatic Host Channel search failed or the GUIDE Plus + system identified the wrong Host Channel for my region.

You can identify your Host Channel manually. See Manual Host Channel setup on page 73 for how to do this.

Chapter 6

Using the digital electronic program guide

This chapter is only applicable if the EPG Type Select setting made in the Setup Navigator (or the Initial Setup menu) is set to Digital EPG.

The Digital EPG system

The Digital EPG shows a table of scheduled digital TV programs and detailed information about individual programs. It also allows you easily to select and tune to a particular program.

The Digital EPG screen consists of Program Information, Channel List and General Program List. This section describes information displayed in the schedule and information windows.

Note that the recorder's clock must be set to the correct time and date to ensure all relevant EPG information is displayed.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - The Digital EPG system - 1
General Program List

1 Appears when the schedule table can be scrolled forward or backward
2 Time schedule
3 Channel list
4 Highlights the currently selected channel
5 Indicates the program set for recording
6 Appears when other programs (often short ones) have been scheduled for the same period
7 Program title
8 Time dividers

  • The general program list may show sections whose bottom right corners have been folded. This indicates that other programs have been scheduled for that period. To view the title of such a program and related information, highlight a folded section, and then press / .

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - The Digital EPG system - 2
Program information

1 Channel number
2 Station name
3 Program title
4 Appear when other programs have been scheduled for the same period
5 Program schedule
6 Program genre

Using the Digital EPG

Using the Digital EPG you can check the schedule of digital TV programs, view information about desired programs, and/or select programs.

1 GUIDE Press to display the Digital EPG screen.

The EPG screen updates automatically if the EPG data is acquired successfully. If not, the Digital EPG screen shows a blank image.

2 Select a TV program.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a TV program. - 1

  • Press CHANNEL +/- to skip to the next or previous channel list page.
    Information about the selected program appears in the information window.
  • To watch a program currently on air, select the program (then press ENTER).
  • You can check information about programs scheduled up to 1 week ahead, depending on conditions.
  • Depending on conditions, it may take some time to acquire EPG data.

3 Press to view more information about the selected program.

Detailed information appears in the schedule window. If the screen contains further information, More ... is displayed.

  • To quit the display of detailed information, press INFO again (or RETURN/EXIT).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press to view more information about the selected program. - 1

4 GUIDE Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.

Setting timer programs

Using the Digital EPG, it's easy to set digital TV programs for recording.

1 Guide Press to display the Digital EPG screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Setting timer programs - 1

Select a program.

  • Select a program currently on-air: press ENTER to close the Digital EPG screen watch the channel immediately, or press RED to set the program for recording immediately.
  • Select a program not yet started then press ENTER or RED to set the program for recording.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a program. - 1

3 Select 'Yes' to confirm.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a program. - 2

A red clock icon appears for the program.

4 Guide Press to exit the Digital EPG screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a program. - 3

Note

1 The general program list does not show programs that have already finished.

Other useful EPG functions

EPG Jump

1 Press GREEN when the Digital EPG screen (Program List, Detailed information or Search Result) is displayed.

In the 'Date' field select a date (within one week) to jump to.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - EPG Jump - 1

3 In the 'Time' field select a time of the day (0:00 to 23:00) to jump to.

4 Select 'Jump'. The Program List for the specified day and time is displayed.

1 Press YELLOW when the EPG screen (Program List, Detailed information or Search Result) is displayed.
2 In the 'Date' field select a date (within one week) to search in.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - EPG Search - 1

3 In the 'Time' field select the time of day (0:00 to 23:00) to search in.
4 In the 'Genre' field, select the genre to search for. You can search for multiple genres by pressing ENTER after each genre.
5 Select 'OK'.
6 Select 'Search'. The results of your search are

Chapter 7 Recording

About DVD recording

This recorder can record to DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, DVD-R DL and DVD+R DL media. DVD-R and DVD-RW discs can be initialized for Video mode or VR mode recording. Each has its advantages, and it depends on what you want to do with the recording which mode you choose.

If you want to edit your recordings in any significant way, VR mode offers greater possibilities for cutting, copying, and changing the way the video is presented.

Video mode is less flexible when it comes to editing, but it has the advantage that it is compatible with standard DVD players (many of which won't play VR mode discs1).

Once a disc is initialized for a particular mode, all recording on that disc will be in that mode.

DVD+RW discs can be initialized for +VR mode recording.

DVD-RAM discs can be initialized for VR mode recording.

DVD+R discs do not require initializing.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - About DVD recording - 1

Important

The table below shows the maximum number of titles recordable per disc and the maximum number of chapters per title:

Disc type/rec. formatMax. titles (per disc)Max. chapters (per title)
DVD-R/-RW9999
Video mode
DVD-R/-RW/-RAM99999*1
VR mode
DVD+R/+RW4999*2

1 A maximum of 999 chapters are recordable per disc.
^
2 A maximum of 254 chapters are recordable per disc.

  • This recorder cannot play or record unfinalized Video mode and DVD+R discs recorded on another recorder. DVD+RW discs recorded on another recorder are playable on this recorder but are not recordable.
  • The maximum continuous recording time for one title is eight hours when using a DVD+R/+RW disc.

  • If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the total number of recordable titles remaining may not increase.

  • Although this recorder can record PAL, SECAM, NTSC and PAL-60, you can't mix multiple TV line systems on one disc. A disc can contain PAL and SECAM recordings, or NTSC and PAL-60. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 138.
  • Fingergripts, dirt and small scratches on a disc can affect playback and/or recording performance. Please take proper care of your discs.
  • Pioneer takes no responsibility for recording failure due to power cuts, defective discs, or damage to the recorder.
    See also Disc / content format playback compatibility on page 41 for detailed disc compatibility information.

Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs

Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs is generally the same as recording to regular single-layer discs; however, please note the following points:

  • When the recorder switches from the first layer to the second during recording a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc, a new title is automatically started on the new layer.
  • Up to 99 titles can be recorded on a DVD-R DL (Video mode) disc. If the 99th title is being recorded when the layer is switched, recording will stop.
  • Up to 49 titles can be recorded on a DVD+R DL disc.
  • You cannot play, record additional material to, edit or finalize a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc that has been recorded on but not yet finalized on another DVD recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Recording to DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs - 1

Note

1 Some DVD players, such as some Pioneer models, are compatible with VR mode discs. Check the operating instructions for your player for VR mode compatibility information.

About HDD recording

Recording to the hard disk drive (HDD) is very flexible; you have the full choice of recording quality options, including manual mode, and of course you can record, erase and re-record as many times as you like.

The capacity of the hard disk drive means that you can store many hours of video on it, even using the higher quality recording modes.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - About HDD recording - 1

Important

  • The maximum number of titles/chapters per title that can be recorded on the HDD is 999 and 99 respectively. No more recording is possible on the HDD after the maximum number of titles has been reached.
  • The maximum continuous recording time for one title is 12 hours.
  • It is possible to record both PAL and NTSC titles on the HDD. Before recording, you need to make sure that the Input Line System setting (page 138) matches the TV line system of the source you're recording.

HDD Video mode compatibility

When recording to the HDD you can choose to record in one of two formats. Set the format from the HDD Recording Format item in the Initial Setup menu (see page 135).

When set to Video Mode On, high-speed copying from HDD to Video mode DVD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW is possible. When recording a bilingual broadcast, set which channel you want to record from the Initial Setup menu (see Bilingual Recording on page 133).

When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, high-speed copying isn't possible. However, both channels of bilingual broadcasts are recorded and you can switch the audio on playback.

Recorded audio

In all except the LPCM mode, sound is recorded in two channel Dolby Digital format (only Dolby Digital 2.0 can be recorded; Dolby Digital 5.1 recording is not possible). When set to LPCM, sound is recorded in high quality, uncompressed Linear PCM format.

If the broadcast audio is bilingual and you are recording to Video mode DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, or to the HDD with the HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, or on the LPCM setting, use the Bilingual Recording setting (page 133) to select the A/L or B/R audio channel to record before recording starts. In other cases, both channels of a bilingual broadcast will be recorded and you can switch on playback.

Restrictions on video recording

You cannot record copy-protected video using this recorder. Copy-protected video includes DVD-Video discs and some satellite broadcasts. If copy-protected material is encountered during a recording, recording will pause automatically and an error message will be displayed on-screen.

Video that is 'copy-once only' can only be recorded to HDD, CPRM-compatible VR mode DVD-R/RW (see below), or DVD-RAM.

When recording a TV broadcast or through an external input, you can display copy control information on screen. (see Displaying disc information on-screen on page 97).

CPRM

CPRM is a copy protection/scrambling system developed for the recording of 'copy once' broadcast programs. CPRM stands for Content Protection for Recordable Media.

This recorder is CPRM compatible, which means that you can record copy-once broadcast programs, but you cannot then make a copy of those recordings. CPRM recordings can only be made on CPRM-compatible DVD-R (ver. 2.0 / 8x or higher) or DVD-RW (ver. 1.1 or higher) discs formatted in VR mode, DVD-RAM discs or on the HDD.

DVD CPRM recordings can only be played on players that are specifically compatible with CPRM.

Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

Using the built-in A.TV and D.TV tuners

Switching between A.TV and D.TV tuners

  • MAN+SUB +A.T.D.T. Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and A.TV (analog).

Changing channels

There are a number of ways to select analog and digital TV channels. Note that you can't change the TV channel during playback, recording or during recording standby.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing channels - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing channels - 2
CHANNEL + / - buttons

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing channels - 3

Number buttons

For example, to select channel 4 (digital channel D004), press 4 then ENTER; for channel 34 (digital channel D034), press 3, 4, ENTER.2

  • CH +/- buttons on the front panel.
  • For D.TV channels only, you can also use the Channel List—see below.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Number buttons - 1

Tip

  • When changing terrestrial digital broadcast channels, channels with a low signal strength may result in a black screen being displayed.
  • For other channels, it may take a short while for the channel picture to appear, and/or for the channel number to appear.
  • In both of the above cases, some improvement may be possible by adjusting the antenna.

Using the D.TV Channel List

When in D,TV mode, you can call up the on-screen Channel List anytime by pressing ENTER. Use the / buttons to select a channel, then press ENTER to switch to that channel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the D.TV Channel List - 1

Displaying a channel banner

A channel banner shows program titles, start and end times of the current program and other channel information. The information is updated every minute.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Displaying a channel banner - 1

Press to display the channel banner for the channel.

D001Wed.30-Apr 12:46
New11:30-12:00
Next12:00-12:30
  • Use the / buttons to display the channel banner for other channels. To switch to the displayed banner's channel, press ENTER.
  • The channel banner displays the Subtitles (□) and MHEG (■) icon if that channel supports the MHEG application (see Using the MHEG application below).
    To see more detailed channel information, press INFO again.4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Displaying a channel banner - 2

Use the / buttons to display information about previous and following programs. Use the / buttons to see information about other channels.

  • If there is still more information to be displayed, More ... is displayed; press the BLUE button to see the extra information.
  • To hide the channel banner, press RETURN/EXIT.

Changing D.TV audio languages

  • [ ] Press to display the current audio language. Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages.

Changing D.TV subtitle languages

  • SUBTITLE Press to display the current subtitle language. Press repeatedly to change it to other available languages.

Note

  1. If you select a locked channel, you will need to enter your password to access it.
    While listening to D.TV radio channels, the screen saver automatically starts after no button has been pressed for 3 minutes.
    2 Analog channel presets are numbered 1 to 99; digital channel presets are numbered D001 to D999.
    3 Due to inaccurate information provided by the broadcaster, some icons may occasionally be present or absent in error.
    4 Not all channels supply more detailed information.

Using the MHEG application

(UK only)

Some stations bring you programs with the MHEG (Multimedia and Hypermedia Expert Group) application encoded, letting you experience D.TV interactively.

The channel banner displays an icon ( 日 ) to indicate that the MHEG application can be run.

  • MANF.SUB + TEXT Press to start the MHEG application.2

  • You can also use any of the colour buttons.

  • Press TEXT to quit the MHEG application.

Changing A.TV audio channels

You can change the audio channel of the broadcast or external input signal.

ALOo Press to change the audio type.

The current audio channel is displayed on-screen.

  • If the NICAM audio setting (see NICAM Select on page 133) is set to NICAM and you are watching a NICAM broadcast, you can switch between NICAM and Regular (non-NICAM) audio.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing A.TV audio channels - 1

  • If the NICAM broadcast is bilingual, you can also select the language.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing A.TV audio channels - 2

  • You can also select the language for a non-NICAM bilingual broadcast.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing A.TV audio channels - 3

  • When watching a recording made from an external input with Bilingual recording selected (see External Audio on page 133), you can switch the audio channel between left (L), right (R) or both (L + R)

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing A.TV audio channels - 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing A.TV audio channels - 5

Note

  • When recording to the HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode, or on the LPCM setting, only one channel of a bilingual broadcast is recorded. In this case, decide which language you want to record before recording by setting the Bilingual Recording setting (see Bilingual Recording on page 133).

Switching between TV and DVD

When the recorder is stopped or recording you can choose whether to have the audio/video from the built-in TV tuner (or external input) play on your TV ('DVD mode'), or watch the channel that the TV is currently set to ('TV mode').

During playback or when a menu is being displayed onscreen, the sound and video is always routed to your TV and is unaffected by the TV/DVD mode setting.

Note that the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable to be able to use this feature.

TV/DVD

  • Switch between TV mode and DVD mode.

Note

If you start recording while the MHEG application is running, the MHEG application screen will also be recorded. To avoid this, quit the application first, then start recording. It is not possible to start the MHEG application while recording is in progress.
2 This function is not available when subtitle display is active.

Setting the picture quality/recording time

DVD(VR) DVD(Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Before starting a recording, you will usually want to set the picture quality/recording time. There are six standard settings available, which allow you to choose a balance between picture quality and recording time.

When Manual Recording is set to On (see Manual Recording on page 135), a further option will be available (MN1 to MN32 or LPCM, depending on what you set).

When recording to DVD +R / + RW SLP is the longest recording time available. If you select SEP or MN1 to MN3, the recording mode will automatically revert to SLP.

REC MODE

- Press repeatedly to select the recording quality.

  • XP - High quality setting, gives about one hour of recording time on a DVD disc.
  • SP (Standard Play) - Default quality, used for most applications, gives about two hours of recording time on a DVD.
  • LP (Long Play) - Lower video quality than SP, but doubles the recording time on a DVD to about four hours.
  • EP (Extended Play) - Lower quality than LP, but gives about six hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
  • SLP (Super Long Play) – Lower quality than EP, but gives about eight hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
  • SEP (Super Extended Play) - Lowest video quality but gives about ten hours of recording time on a DVD disc.
  • MN1 to MN32 / LPCM ^1 - Manual / Linear PCM (available only when manual recording is on)

The setting is indicated in the front panel display, and shown on-screen together with the recording time for a blank recordable disc. If a recordable disc is loaded, the approximate remaining recording time for that disc is also shown. (Note that if the On Screen Display setting (see On Screen Display on page 137) is Off then this information is not displayed.)

Basic recording from the TV

DVD(VR) DVD(Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Basic recording from the TV involves just setting the channel to record, choosing whether to record to the HDD or a DVD and selecting the recording quality.

HDD/DVD

1 Select the HDD or DVD for recording.

  • If you're recording to DVD, load a recordable disc (if you load a new blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder takes a short while to initialize the disc).
  • If you want to record a VR mode DVD-R or a Video mode DVD-RW, you must initialize it before proceeding (see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 87).

2 MAnT ^+ ATVD. Press to switch between D.TV (digital) and A.TV (analog).

CHANNEL+ 3 Select a TV channel to record.

The front panel display shows the channel number, or channel name if it's available:

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - CHANNEL+ 3 Select a TV channel to record. - 1

While the recorder is stopped, you can also use the number buttons on the remote to select the channel (For channel 24, press 2.4 then ENTER).
- If the recorder is stopped, you can also use the CH +/- buttons on the front panel to select the channel number.

BEC MODE

4 Set the picture quality/recording time.

  • See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 82 for detailed instructions.

5 MANI LSUB ^+ ADO If you're recording from the A.TV tuner, select the audio channel to record.

See Changing A.TV audio channels on page 81 for more on this.

  • When recording in VR mode, if a broadcast is bilingual, both audio channels are recorded, allowing you to switch the audio channel on playback. The only exception to this is when the picture quality is set to LPCM, in which case you do need to select the audio channel before recording.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - MANI LSUB ^+ ADO If you're recording from the A.TV tuner, select the audio channel to record. - 1

Note

Audio is recorded in 16-bit Linear PCM format, video is recorded at XP quality. When recording a bilingual broadcast, select which audio channel to record (see Bilingual Recording on page 133).

6 MAN + ALOO If you're recording from the D.TV tuner, select the audio language to record.

  • You may also be able to set which subtitle language to record; use SUBTITLE to select.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - MAN + ALOO If you're recording from the D.TV tuner, select the audio language to record. - 1

7 Start recording.

If you want to set a recording end time, press the REC button repeatedly. The recording time increases in 30 minute increments, up to a maximum of six hours. The time the recording will end is shown on-screen and in the front panel display. When the recording ends, the recorder automatically switches into standby if no other operation is being performed.

  • To cancel the set recording time, press REC.
  • If you want to pause recording at any time1, press II PAUSE. Press again to restart the recording (if recording to the HDD, DVD-RAM or in VR mode, a new chapter is started after recording restarts).

STOPREC

8 Press to stop recording.

  • If you set the recording time in the previous step, you can still stop the recording anytime by pressing STOP RECR.
  • Recording will stop automatically when there is no more space on the HDD/DVD, or after 12 hours of HDD recording (whichever is sooner).

If VPS/PDC is active for two timer programs that are programmed to start at the same time, then the program that actually starts first takes priority.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press to stop recording. - 1

Tip

  • During recording you can turn on/off the SCART loop through function. During recording, press the front panel CH + button to switch to SCART THRU (loop through on), or CH - to switch to SCART NORM (loop through off). Loop through is automatically reset to off after recording has finished. Note that you can't switch loop through on if recording from the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) or AV1(RGB)-TV connectors.

Pause Live TV

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Pause Live TV - 1

The Pause Live TV feature lets you effectively pause a TV program you're watching. When you're ready to resume watching, just press the PLAY button.

Setting up for Pause Live TV

You can use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV connected using a SCART cable (see TVtuner setup for Pause Live TV below), or using this recorder's internal tuner (see Using the recorder's internal tuner for Pause Live TV below).

TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV

To use this feature with an external TV tuner, the recorder must be connected to your TV using a SCART cable, and the AV Link setting (page 138) should be set to This Recorder Only.2 See also Pause Live TV on page 129 for more on this.

In order to use Pause Live TV, make the following connections and settings.

  • Pause Live TV will not work as expected when watching TV via an external component such as a VCR or digital tuner. It only works with the channel selected on the TV.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - TV tuner setup for Pause Live TV - 1

Important

  • Pause Live TV only works with the built-in A.TV (analog) tuner. It does not work with the D.TV tuner or the external inputs. Make sure the Auto Channel Setting is set to Download from TV (see Auto Channel Setting on page 131).

1 Connect this recorder to your TV with a SCART cable.

2 Press HOME MENU.

3 Select 'Initial Setup' > 'Analog Tuner' > 'Auto Channel Setting' > 'Download from TV'.

  • If the Download from TV option appears grayed out, check the connections to your TV and try again.
    Depending on your TV, you might have to switch off and unplug it for a few moments before plugging it back in and switching on.

4 Follow the on-screen instructions.

Note

1 Except during Chase Play.
2 - Not all TVs support this feature. Check the instructions that came with your TV if you're not sure.
This feature will not work unless your TV is compatible with AV Link. See the operating instructions that came with your TV if you're unsure about your TV's compatibility with this feature.

Using the recorder's internal tuner for Pause Live TV If you haven't connected to your TV using a SCART cable (or your TV is not compatible with AV Link) you can use the recorder's internal tuner for the Pause Live TV.

1 Press HOME MENU.

2 Select 'Initial Setup' > 'Basic' > 'Pause Live TV' > 'Recorder's Tuner'.

See Pause Live TV on page 129 to do this.

You can record the channel selected on the recorder.

Using Pause Live TV

PAUSE LIVE TV

1 Start recording the current TV channel.

Recording continues with playback paused.

  • Note that it may take up to 10 seconds for recording to start.

PLAY

2 ( ) Press to start playback.

You can also use the scan buttons (▲/▲), pause (■ PAUSE) and stop (■ STOP)—all without affecting the recording.

STOPREC

Press to stop the recording.

The operation is slightly different depending on the viewing source. See the Operation table below for details.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press to stop the recording. - 1

Tip

  • When the Pause Live TV setting (see page 129) is set to TV's Tuner, you can press PAUSE LIVE TV while the recorder is in standby to switch on and immediately start recording. When set to Recorder's Tuner, it is not possible to use the Pause Live TV feature from standby.
  • After pressing PAUSE LIVE TV, it will take at least 10 seconds for the picture to change (during this time, all controls except the power button are inoperative). (Note that startup from standby is not possible if you have selected Recorder's Tuner in Pause Live TV on page 129.)
  • Please note that you can't record from another component (VCR, etc.) that is connected by a SCART cable to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) connector using the Pause Live TV feature.

Operation table

Viewing sourceTV/DVD mode of DVRDVR sourcePause Live TV function buttonCondition
TV built-in analog tunerTV-Pause Live TVPreset channel of DVR and TV are matched after downloading from TV
Direct TV recording*1Preset channel of DVR and TV are NOT matched after downloading from TV. Record TV program that you're watching.
TV built-in digital tunerTV-Direct TV recording*1Preset channel info. in D.TV cannot be shared by DVR even after Download from TV. Record TV program that you're watching.
External input of TVTV-Direct TV recording*1Record TV program that you're watching.
DVR built-in analog tunerDVDDVR built-in analog tunerPause Live TV
DVR built-in digital tunerDVDDVR built-in digital tunerPause Live TV

*1 No Chase Play! Warning if you change input this will stop the recording.

Simultaneous recording and playback (Chase Play)

HDD

Chase Play allows you to watch a recording that is still in progress from the start, without having to wait until the recording has finished (i.e., playback is 'chasing' the recording).

In fact, you're not just limited to watching the recording in progress. You can watch anything else already on the HDD (or on a DVD if you're recording to the HDD) by selecting it from the Disc Navigator screen (see Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD on page 91).

Chase Play is not possible when DV is the recording input.

PLAY

  • Press during recording to start playback from the beginning of the current recording1.
  • Press during recording to select another title to play.

You can use all the usual playback controls, such as pause, slow-motion play, scan and skip.

  • To stop playback, press STOP (recording will continue).
  • To stop recording, press STOP REC (playback will continue).
  • During recording or in timer recording standby, you can't play an HDD title, DVD or Video CD/Super VCD disc if the Input Line System setting doesn't match the TV line system of the disc/HDD title (see also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 138). Also, during simultaneous recording and playback, if the TV line system of the playback track/title changes then playback will automatically stop.

Recording from an external component

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

You can record from an external component, such as a camcorder or VCR, connected to one of the recorder's external inputs.

1 Make sure that the component you want to record from is connected properly to the DVD recorder.

See Chapter 2 (Connecting up) for connection options.

VIDEO IN

2 Press repeatedly to select one of the external inputs to record from.

The current input is shown on-screen and in the front panel display:

AV2/L1-Input 12
L2-Input 2(front panel)
L3-Input 3

Check that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 133).

  • If the aspect ratio is distorted (squashed or stretched), adjust on the source component or your TV before recording.
  • To watch video coming in via the DV input (front panel), select DV > DV Video Playback from the Home Menu (see also Playing from a DV camcorder on page 98).

REC MODE

3 Set the recording quality.

See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 82 for detailed information.

HDD/DVD

4 Select the HDD or DVD for recording.

REC

5 Press to start recording.

  • If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 79 for more details.

Note

1 You can't start playback immediately after recording starts. Simultaneous playback and recording doesn't work while copying or backing up.
2 This cannot be selected if AV2/L1 In is set to Decoder (see AV2/L1 In on page 132).

Playing your recordings on other DVD players

DVD (VR) DVD (Video) DVD+R DVD+RW

Most regular DVD players can play finalized discs recorded in Video mode and DVD+R discs. A number of players (including many Pioneer models) can also play DVD-RW discs recorded in VR mode, finalized or not. Most players will not play VR mode DVD-R discs, although some DVD-ROM drives and DVD recorders may be able to (finalization might be necessary). Check the manual that came with the player to check what kinds of discs it will play.

When you finalize a Video mode or DVD+R disc, a title menu is created from which you can select titles when you play the disc. There are a number of different styles of title menu to choose from to suit the content of the disc.

All the title menus are navigated in the usual way, pressing MENU or TOP MENU to display the menu, then using the / / / followed by ENTER to select titles and start playback.

Finalizing a disc

DVD(VR) DVD(Video) DVD+R DVD+RW

Finalizing 'fixes' the recordings on the disc so that it can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.1

Note that the disc name will appear in the title menu after you finalize a disc. Make sure the disc name is as you want it before you finalize the disc as it can't be changed afterwards. If you want to rename the disc, see Input Disc Name on page 124 before starting the steps below.

DVD+RW discs don't generally need finalizing. However, if you want a title menu to appear when you play the disc, then you will need to finalize. When using a DVD+RW, you can still record and edit even after finalizing. although the title menu will disappear if you do so. Finalize the disc again to generate a new title menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Finalizing a disc - 1

Important

  • Once you've finalized a Video mode or DVD+R disc, you can't edit or record anything else on that disc. However, the finalization on a DVD-RW disc maybe 'undone'; see Undo Finalize on page 125 for how to do this.

  • A VR mode DVD-R/RW (excluding DVD-R DL) disc can still be recorded and edited on this recorder even after finalizing.
    Video mode DVD-R DL discs and DVD+R DL discs must be finalized in order to play in other recorders/ players. Note however that some recorders/players will not play even finalized dual-layer discs.

1 Load the disc you want to finalize.

Make sure that the recorder is stopped before proceeding.

2 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu. - 1

Select 'Finalize' > 'Finalize' > 'Next Screen'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu. - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu. - 3

4 For Video mode and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select 'Yes' to start finalization or 'No' to cancel.

The menu you select will be the one that appears when the 'top menu' (or 'menu' for a DVD +R / + RW ) is selected on any DVD player.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - For Video mode and DVD+R/+RW discs only, select a title menu style, then select 'Yes' to start finalization or 'No' to cancel. - 1

  • Discs recorded partially or fully on the Pioneer DVR7000 DVD recorder do not support this feature. These discs will have only a text title menu when finalized on this recorder.

5 The recorder will now start finalizing the disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - The recorder will now start finalizing the disc. - 1

Note

If the TV line system of the disc is different to the current setting of the recorder, you will not be able to finalize the disc. See Additional information about the TV system settings on page 138 for how to change the recorder's setting.

During finalization:

  • If the finalization process of a DVD-RW or DVD+R/ +RW disc is going to take more than around four minutes, you can press ENTER to cancel. Around four minutes before completion, the option to cancel disappears.
  • You can't cancel the finalization of a VR mode DVD-R disc.
  • How long finalization takes depends on the type of disc, how much is recorded on the disc and the number of titles on the disc. A disc recorded in VR mode can take up to one hour to finalize. Video mode DVD-R/-RW and DVD+R/+RW discs can take up to 20 minutes.

Initializing recordable DVD discs

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM

DVD-R/-RW discs can be initialized for either Video mode recording or VR mode recording.

When you first load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder initializes it for recording automatically. By default, blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording. See DVD-RWAutoInit. on page 135 if you want to change the default to Video mode.

DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recordings out of the box; if you want to use a DVD-R for VR mode recording, you must initialize it before recording anything on the disc.

DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized in order to erase the contents of the disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Initializing recordable DVD discs - 1

Important

  • Initializing a DVD-RW, DVD+RW or DVD-RAM disc will erase everything recorded on it. Make sure there is nothing on the disc that you want to keep!
  • You may not be able to re-initialize a DVD-RW disc in a different format if it was originally initialized on an older DVD recorder.
  • Once initialized for VR mode recording, you can't reinitialize a DVD-R back to Video mode.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

2 Select 'Initialize' > 'Video Mode', 'VR Mode' or 'Initialize DVD+RW'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 2

3 Select 'Start'.

It takes about 30 seconds to initialize the disc (except DVD-RAM discs, which can take up to 1 hour).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Start'. - 1

Chapter 8

Playback

Introduction

Most of the features described in this chapter make use of on-screen displays. Navigate these using the cursor buttons and ENTER. To go back one level from any screen, use the RETURN/EXIT button.

Remember also that the button guide at the bottom of every screen shows which buttons do what.

Many of the functions covered in this chapter apply to the HDD, DVD discs, Video CDs, Super VCDs, WMA/MP3/ DivX discs and CDs, although the exact operation of some varies slightly with the kind of disc loaded.

  • Many functions are not available when a Video CD is playing in PBC mode. Start playback from the Disc Navigator screen for non-PBC playback (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 92).
  • For discs that contain JPEG picture files, see The PhotoViewer on page 118.

Basic playback

ALL

This section shows you how to use your recorder for playback of discs (DVD, CD, etc.), and for playback of video from the HDD.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Basic playback - 1

Important

Throughout this manual, the term 'DVD' means any kind of playable or recordable DVD. If a function is specific to a particular kind of DVD disc, it is specified.
- Some DVD-Video, DVD+R and DVD+RW discs don't allow certain playback controls to operate at certain points in the disc. This is not a malfunction.

HDD/DVD

1 Select the HDD or DVD for playback.

  • If playing video from the HDD, skip to step 3 below.
  • Select DVD for any kind of disc playback.

OPEN/CLOSE

2 [Front panel] Load a disc.

Load a disc with the label side facing up, using the disc tray guide to align the disc (if you're loading a double-sided DVD-Video disc, load it with the side you want to play face down).

  • If you want to play a DTS audio CD, please first read the note on page 90.

3 0 Start playback.

  • If you're playing a DVD-Video or Video CD, a disc menu may appear when you start playback. Use the / / / buttons and ENTER to navigate DVD disc menus, and the number buttons and ENTER for Video CD menus.
  • When playing video from the HDD, playback will automatically stop after the end of a title is reached.
  • There may be a slight pause when playback switches from the first to the second layer of a dual-layer disc.
    See the following sections for more details on playing specific kinds of discs.

STOP

4 Press to stop playback.

5 When you've finished using the recorder, eject the disc and switch the recorder back into standby.

Playing DVD discs

The table below shows the basic playback controls for DVD-Video, and recordable DVD discs.

PLAYPress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped.
STOPPress to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing▶PLAY. (Press ▲ STOP again to cancel the resume function.)
PAUSEPauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
NEXTPress to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.
PREVPress to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/- buttons.) DVD+R/DVD+RW only: ▲ PREV may not always skip to the previous title.
ENTERExcept VR mode: During playback, enter a chapter number then press ENTER to skip directly to that chapter within the currently playing title. On some discs, you can also use the number buttons to select numbered items in the disc menu. VR mode only: During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER. AII: Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.
DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only: (Commercial back/skip) Press to skip backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or three minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction.
Press to display the menu of a DVD-Video disc. (DVD+R/+RW discs finalized on this recorder will display the Disc Navigator. Press MENU to display the disc menu.)
Use the cursor buttons to navigate DVD-Video disc menus; press ENTER to select items.
RETURNPress to return to the previous level of a DVD-Video disc menu.

Playing from the HDD

The table below shows the basic playback controls when playing video recorded on the hard disk (HDD).

PLAYPress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback automatically stops after the end of a title is reached.
STOPPress to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing▶PLAY. (Press ▲ STOP again to cancel the resume function.)
PAUSEPauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
PREV NEXTPress to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.
Press to skip to previous/next chapter/title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/- buttons.)
During playback, enter a title number then press ENTER to skip directly to that title. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.
ENTER
(Commercial back/skip) Press to skip backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or three minutes back.
While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed. While paused, press to advance a single frame in either direction.

Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs

The table below shows the basic playback controls for audio CDs1, and WMA/MP3 files.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 1

Press to start playback.

STOP

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 2

Press to stop playback.

PAUSE

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 3

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 5

Except WMA: Press to start scanning. Press again to increase the scanning speed. (There are two scan speeds; the current scan speed is shown on-screen.)

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 6

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 7

Press to skip to previous/next track (or folder for WMA/MP3 disc). (During playback you can also use the front panel CH+/− buttons.)

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 8

During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing CDs and WMA/MP3 discs - 9

Playing Video CD/Super VCDs

The table below shows the basic playback controls for Video CD/Super VCDs.

Some discs featurePlayback Control (PBC for short) menus. These discs show PBC in the display when you load them and display a menu on-screen from where you can select what to watch.2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 1

Press to start playback. Video CD only: If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped.

STOP

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 2

Press to stop playback. Video CD only: You can resume playback from the same point by pressing PLAY. (Press STOP again to cancel the resume function.)

PAUSE

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 3

Pauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 5

Press to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 6

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 7

Press to skip to previous/next track. When a PBC menu is displayed, press to display the previous/next page. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/- buttons.)

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 8

During playback, enter a track number then press ENTER to skip directly to that track. Press CLEAR to clear a number entry and start again. While a PBC menu screen is displayed, use to select numbered menu items.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 9

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 10

Video CD in non-PBC mode only: Press to skip backward/forward progressively up to a maximum of ten minutes forward or three minutes back.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 11

While paused, press and hold to start slow-motion playback. Press repeatedly to change the playback speed (forward only). While paused, press to advance a single frame (forward only).

RETURN

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing Video CD/Super VCDs - 12

Press to display the disc menu of a Video CD/Super VCD playing in PBC mode.

Note

1 If you want to play a DTS audio CD, make sure the recorder is connected to a DTS-compatible amp/receiver with a digital connection. Noise will be output through the analog outputs. Also make sure that STEREO is selected using the AUDIO button (see Switching audio channels on page 96).
2 When playing in PBC mode, some playback features, such as search, repeat and program play are not available. You can play a PBC Video CD/Super VCD in non-PBC mode by starting playback using the Disc Navigator (see Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs on page 92).

Playing DivX video files

The table below shows the basic playback controls for DivX video files.

PLAYPress to start playback. If RESUME is displayed on-screen, playback starts from the place last stopped. Playback of titles (DivX files) proceeds in alphabetical order.
STOPPress to stop playback. You can resume playback from the same point by pressing▶PLAY. (Press ▲ STOP again to cancel the resume function.)
PAUSEPauses playback, or restarts playback when paused.
PREV NEXTPress to start scanning. Press repeatedly to increase the scanning speed. Press to skip to previous/next title. (During playback you can also use the front panel CH +/- buttons.)
While paused, press to advance one frame. Press and hold to start slow motion playback (press repeatedly to change the slow motion play speed).
MAIN+SUB+Press to display the playback audio type; press repeatedly to change the playback audio type.
SUBTITLEPress to display subtitle information; press repeatedly to change subtitles.

Using the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc

Use the Disc Navigator to browse the contents of a disc and start playback.

Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

You can use the Disc Navigator to browse and edit video on recordable DVDs and the HDD, and to view information on titles.

See also Editing on page 100 for more on editing. recordable discs.

HDD/DVD

1 Select the HDD or DVD.

2 DISC (NAVIGATION) Open the Disc Navigator.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD - 1

  • You can also access the Disc Navigator from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Disc Navigator with recordable discs and the HDD - 2

3 Browse the list of titles.

  • Use the PREV/NEXT buttons to display the previous/next page of titles.
  • To change the thumbnail picture displayed for a title see Set Thumbnail on page 103.
  • For HDD recordings, you should be able to see a thumbnail title digest. If it doesn't display, set Set Preview to Normal. See Set Preview on page 138.

4 Enter Play the highlighted title.

  • You can also select Play from the command menu options.

Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator

You can choose to display titles in the Disc Navigator in various different ways, sorted alphabetically, by recording date, by genre, and so on. You can also choose whether to display four or eight titles on the screen at the same time.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Changing the display style of the Disc Navigator - 1

Display the View Options panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Display the View Options panel. - 1
The View Options panel

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Display the View Options panel. - 2

2 Choose 'Style', 'Sort order' or 'Genre', then press ENTER to see the available view options.

  • Style - Select four or eight titles per screen view
  • Sort order - Sort by date (most recent first), unmatched first, title name or recording date (oldest first)
  • Genre - Display all genres or just a selected genre

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choose 'Style', 'Sort order' or 'Genre', then press ENTER to see the available view options. - 1

Choose a view option, then press ENTER.

The title list display is updated according to the new display preferences.

Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs

DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3 DivX

1 HOME MENU Display the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Using the Disc Navigator with playback-only discs - 1

Select 'Disc Navigator'.

Alternatively, for a CD, Video CD, Super VCD or WMA/ MP3/DivX disc, you can press DISC NAVIGATOR, which takes you straight to the Disc Navigator screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Disc Navigator'. - 1

Select what you want to play.

Depending on the type of disc you have loaded, the Disc Navigator looks slightly different, but they are all navigated in the same way.

The screen below shows a WMA/MP3/DivX disc.

Navigate to the folder, or the track/title within a folder that you want to play.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select what you want to play. - 1

Playback starts after you press ENTER.

  • For discs that contain CD-Audio tracks and WMA/MP3 tracks or DivX titles, you can switch the playback area between CD, WMA/MP3 and DivX. This can only be done while the disc is stopped.

Scanning discs

ALL (except WMA)

You can scan discs at various speeds, forwards or backwards.1

1 During playback, start reverse or forward scanning.

  • The scanning speed is shown on-screen.

2 Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed.

There are four scanning speeds available when playing HDD video, a DVD or a DivX title. Reverse playback is also possible with HDD and DVD video.2

There are two scanning speeds for other types of disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Press repeatedly to change the scanning speed. - 1

Resume normal playback.

Playing in slow motion

DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX

You can play video at various slow motion speeds. DVDs and video on the HDD can be played in slow motion in either direction, while Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles can only be played forwards in slow motion.

There is no sound when playing in slow motion.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing in slow motion - 1

1 Pause playback.

2 Press and hold to start slow motion reverse or forward play.

Press repeatedly to change the slow motion speed.

The current playback speed is indicated on-screen.

4 Resume normal playback.

Note

1 No subtitles are displayed when scanning DVDs and DivX titles.
- Analog and digital sound is output when scanning DVDs and DivX titles with Dolby Digital or Linear PCM sound on forward SCAN 1 (Linear PCM is output from the coaxial digital output, except during chase playback and simultaneous recording/playback). No sound is output when using other scan speeds.
- No sound is output when scanning from the HDD, except on forward SCAN 1. (Linear PCM is output from the coaxial digital output during forward SCAN 1).
Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached on a DVD disc.
2 Reverse playback may not be smooth.
3 Depending on the disc, normal playback may automatically resume when a new chapter is reached.

Frame advance/frame reverse

DVD HDD Video CD Super VCD DivX

You can advance or back up video on a DVD disc or the HDD frame-by-frame.

With Video CDs/Super VCDs and DivX titles, you can only use frame advance.

PAUSE

1 II Pause playback.

Back up or advance one frame with each press.

PLAY

3 Resume normal playback.

The Play Mode menu

ALL

The Play Mode menu gives you access to search functions, repeat and program play functions.

- HOME MENU Select 'Play Mode' from the Home Menu.

  • You can also access the Play Mode menu by pressing PLAY MODE.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - - HOME MENU Select 'Play Mode' from the Home Menu. - 1

  • To exit the Play Mode menu, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE.

Search Mode

ALL

The Search Mode feature lets you start playback from a specified point in a disc by time or by title/chapter/folder/track number.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Search Mode - 1

1 Select 'Search Mode' from the Play Mode menu, then choose a search option.

The available search options depend on the type of disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Search Mode' from the Play Mode menu, then choose a search option. - 1

2 Enter a title/chapter/folder/track number or a search time.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Enter a title/chapter/folder/track number or a search time. - 1

Time Search (HDD, DVD): For example, for 25 minutes into the current title, press 2, 5, 0, 0. For 1 hour and 15 minutes and 20 seconds into the title, press 1, 1, 5, 2, 0.

Time Search (Video CD): For example, for 2 minutes and 30 seconds into the current track, press 2, 3, 0.

Title/Chapter/Folder/Track Search: For example, for track 6, press 6.

3 ENTER Start playback.

A-B Repeat

DVD HDD CD VideoCD DivX

The A-B Repeat function allows you to specify two points (A and B) within a track or title that form a loop which is played over and over.2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - A-B Repeat - 1

1 During playback, select 'A-B Repeat' from the Play Mode menu.

2 Enter With 'A (Loop Start)' highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Enter With 'A (Loop Start)' highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to start. - 1

3 Enter With 'B (Loop End)' highlighted, press at the point you want the loop to end.

Playback immediately jumps back to the start point and plays the loop round and round.

  • When playing a DVD-Video/Video mode DVD, or from the HDD, the start and end points of the loop must be in the same title.
    To resume normal playback, select Off from the A-B Repeat menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.

Repeat play

ALL

There are various repeat play options, depending on the kind of disc loaded, or if you're using the HDD for playback. It's also possible to use repeat play together with program play to repeat the tracks/chapters in the program list (see Program play below).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Repeat play - 1

  • Select 'Repeat' from the Play Mode menu, then choose a repeat play mode.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Repeat play - 2

  • To resume normal playback, select Repeat Off from the Repeat Play menu, or press CLEAR if no menu OSD (such as the Play Mode menu) is displayed.

Note

1 When using time search, playback may occasionally start slightly before or after the time you input.
2 If you switch camera angles on a DVD during A-B repeat play, A-B repeat is canceled.
3 If you switch the camera angle during repeat play of a DVD-Video disc, repeat play is canceled.

Program play

HDD DVD-Video CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3

This feature lets you program the play order of titles/chapters ^1 /bundles/tracks on a disc or the HDD.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Program play - 1

Select 'Program' from the Play Mode n 'Input/Edit Program'.

The Input/Edit Program screen varies according to the disc type. Below is the DVD input screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Program' from the Play Mode n 'Input/Edit Program'. - 1

2 Select a title, chapter, folder or track for the current step in the program list.

After pressing ENTER to add the title/chapter/folder/ track, the step number automatically moves down one.

  • To insert a step into the program list, highlight the step number where you want to insert another step, then select a chapter/title/folder/track as usual. After pressing ENTER, all the subsequent steps move down one.
  • To delete a step from the program list, highlight the step you want to delete, then press CLEAR.

3 Repeat step 2 to build up a program list.

A program list can contain up to 24 titles/chapters/folders/tracks.

4 PLAY Play the program list.

Program play remains active until you cancel program play, erase the program list, eject the disc or switch off the recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - PLAY Play the program list. - 1

Tip

  • To save your program list and exit the program edit screen without starting playback, press HOME MENU or PLAY MODE.

During program play, press NEXT to skip to the next program step.
- To repeat play the program list, select Program Repeat from the Repeat Play Mode menu (see Repeat play on page 94).
- Press CLEAR during playback to switch off program play (if no menu OSD, such as the Disc Navigator, is displayed). Press while stopped to erase the program list.
- From the Program menu you can also:
Start Program Play - Starts playback of a saved program list
Cancel Program Play - Turns off program play, but does not erase the program list
Erase Program List - Erases the program list and turns off program play

Displaying and switching subtitles

DVD-Video DivX

Some DVD and DivX discs have subtitles in one or more languages; the disc box will usually tell you which subtitle languages are available. You can switch subtitle language during playback.2

Check the disc packaging for details of the subtitle options.

  • Subtitle MANT LSUB + Select/change the subtitle language.

The current subtitle language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display.

  • To switch off subtitles, press SUBTITLE then CLEAR.

Note

1 When playing a program list of DVD-Video chapters, chapters not included in the program list may be sometimes be played, depending on the disc.
2 • Some discs only allow you to change subtitle language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
- To set subtitle preferences, see Subtitle Language on page 134.

Switching DVD and DivX soundtracks

DVD-Video DivX

When playing a DVD disc or DivX title recorded with two or more soundtracks (often in different languages), you can switch the soundtrack during playback.

Check the disc packaging for details of the soundtrack options.

MANT+SUB ^+ AUDO Change the audio soundtrack.

The current audio language is shown on-screen and in the front panel display.

  • The sound may drop out for a few seconds when switching soundtracks.
  • Some discs feature both Dolby Digital and DTS soundtracks. There is no analog audio output when DTS is selected. To listen to the DTS soundtrack, connect this recorder to a DTS decoder or AV amp/ receiver with built-in DTS decoder via the digital output. See Connecting other AV sources on page 52 for connection details.

Switching audio channels

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD CD Video CD Super VCD WMA/MP3

For HDD^2 and VR mode content recorded with bilingual audio, you can switch between left (L) channel, right (R) channel, or both (L + R) .3

When playing Video CDs and audio CDs you can switch between stereo, just the left channel or just the right channel.

Some Super VCDs have two soundtracks. With these discs you can switch between the two soundtracks as well as individual channels in each.

ALDO Press repeatedly to display/swithe audio channel.

The audio channel(s) currently playing are indicated on-screen.

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM

L+R-Both channels (default)
L - Left channel only
R - Right channel only

CD Video CD WMA/MP3

Stereo - Stereo (default)

1/L - Left channel only
2/R - Right channel only

Super VCD

1 Stereo - Soundtrack 1 / Stereo (default)
1 L-Soundtrack 1/Left channel
1R-Soundtrack1/Rightchannel
2 Stereo - Soundtrack 2 / Stereo
2 L - Soundtrack 2 / Left channel
2 R - Soundtrack 2 / Right channel

Switching camera angles

DVD-Video

Some DVD-Video discs feature scenes shot from two or more angles—check the disc box for details: it should be marked with a icon if it contains multi-angle scenes. When a multi-angle scene is playing, the same icon appears on screen to let you know that other angles are available (this can be switched off if you prefer—see Angle Indicator on page 136).

  • ANGLE SWITCH the camera angle.

  • The angle number is displayed on-screen.

  • If the disc was paused, playback starts again with the new angle.

Note

1 • Some discs only allow you to change audio language from the disc menu. Press MENU or TOP MENU to access.
To set audio language preferences, see Audio Language on page 134.
2 Only when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off (HDD Recording Format on page 135).
3 - When playing a Bilingual recording on a VR mode disc, if you are listening to the Dolby Digital soundtrack via the digital output, you cannot switch the audio channel. Set Dolby Digital Out to Dolby Digital PCM (see Dolby Digital Out on page 133) or listen via the analog outputs if you need to switch the audio channel.
- When playing a Dolby Digital source, you can also switch channels from the Dual Mono menu of the receiver subwoofer—see Dual mono setting on page 29.

Displaying disc information on-screen

You can display various on-screen information about the disc loaded or the HDD.

DISPLAY

Display/change the on-screen information.

  • Press once to show the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity together. Press again to show the status of just the currently selected playback/ recording device (HDD or removable disc).
  • To hide the information display, press DISPLAY repeatedly until it disappears.

HDD and removable disc activity display

Press DISPLAY once to see the HDD and removable disc (DVD, etc.) activity. Use the HDD/DVD button to switch between the two kinds of display.

The example displays below show high-speed copying from HDD to DVD, and HDD chase playback.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD and removable disc activity display - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD and removable disc activity display - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD and removable disc activity display - 3

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD and removable disc activity display - 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD and removable disc activity display - 5

Tip

  • See Switching camera angles on page 96 for more on multi-angle scene switching.
  • When using the simultaneous play and record feature, the display shows information for playback only.
  • During real-time copy, the copy source playback information is displayed.
  • The Video mode disc displays become the same as a DVD-Video disc once the disc is finalized.
  • The total recording time figure shown in parenthesis is calculated based on a 12cm / 4.7 GB disc at the displayed record setting.
  • Recording and playback times for TV recordings are approximately 0.1% shorter than the actual time. This is because of the slightly different frame rates of TV broadcasts versus DVD.
  • The frame number is shown next to the elapsed time display when the disc is paused.
  • Copy Once or Can't Record messages may appear in the stop or recording displays. These indicate that the broadcast TV program contains copy control information.

Chapter 9

Playing and recording from a DV camcorder

You can play back and record video from a DV camcorder connected to the DV IN jack on the front panel of this recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Playing and recording from a DV camcorder - 1

Important

  • If you connect a second recorder using a DV cable, you cannot control the second unit from this one.
  • You can't control this unit remotely from a component connected to the DV IN jack.

Playing from a DV camcorder

1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack.

2 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require.

See DV Input on page 133 for more on this.

  • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 133).

3 HOME MENU Select 'DV', then DV Video Playback from the Home Menu.

4 Start playback on the camcorder.

Images from the camcorder should appear on your TV.

  • To record the incoming video, press HDD/DVD to select the HDD or a DVD for recording, then press REC. Press STOP REC to finish recording.
    If there is no signal from the device connected to the DV jack, or the signal is copy-protected, recording will pause. It will automatically restart once there is a recordable signal.
  • The recorder will only start recording from the DV IN jack if there is a valid signal. Recording will pause if the signal is interrupted during recording.
  • If your source is copy-protected using Copy Guard, you will not be able to record it. See Restrictions on video recording on page 79 for more details.

Recording from a DV camcorder

Using the recorder's remote, you can control both the camcorder and this recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Recording from a DV camcorder - 1

Important

  • The source signal must be DVC-SD format.
  • Some camcorders cannot be controlled using this recorder's remote.
  • You can't record date and time information from DV cassette.
  • During DV recording, if a part of the tape is blank, or has copy-protected material on it, this recorder will pause recording. Recording will restart automatically when there is a recordable signal. However, if there is more than 10 seconds of blank tape, this recorder will stop recording and the camcorder should stop (depending on the camcorder).

For best results when recording from a DV camcorder to this recorder, we recommend cueing the camcorder to the place you want to start recording from and setting the camcorder to play-pause.

1 Make sure your DV camcorder is connected to the front panel DV IN jack.

Also, set the camcorder to VTR mode.

REC MODE

2 Set the recording quality.

See Setting the picture quality/recording time on page 82 for detailed information.

3 From the Initial Settings menu, check that the DV audio input is setup as you require.

See DVInput on page 133 for more on this.

  • Check also that the Audio In settings for External Audio and Bilingual Recording are as you want them (see Audio In on page 133).

4 HOME MENU Select 'DV', then 'Copy from a DV Source' from the Home Menu.

  • DV recording only works when the DV camcorder is in VTR mode with a tape loaded.

5

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'DV', then 'Copy from a DV Source' from the Home Menu. - 1

Select 'Record to Hard Disk Drive' or

'Record to DVD'.

6 Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from.

For best results, pause playback at the point from which you want to record.

Depending on your camcorder, you can use this recorder's remote to control the camcorder using the , , , , , and buttons.

7

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. - 1
Select 'Start Rec'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. - 2

  • You can pause or stop the recording by selecting Pause Rec or Stop Rec from the on-screen display. You cannot control the camcorder from this remote control during recording.
  • If you restart recording after stopping the camcorder, the first few seconds of the camcorder tape will not be recorded. Use the pause button on your camcorder instead and recording will start immediately.
  • HDD, DVD (VR Mode) and DVD-RAM only: A chapter marker is inserted every time there is a break in the timecode on the DV tape. This happens when the recording is stopped or paused then restarted, for example.
  • If you don't want to see the DV recording screen during recording, press DISPLAY to hide it (press again to display).
  • While recording, you cannot exit the DV recording screen using the HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT button.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Find the place on the camcorder tape that you want to start recording from. - 3

Frequently Asked Questions

  • I can't get my DV camcorder to work with the recorder! Check that the DV cable is properly connected. Also make sure that what you're trying to record is not copy-protected.

If it still doesn't work, try switching off the camcorder then switch back on.

  • There's a picture, but no sound!

Try switching the DV Input setting (see DV Input on page 133) between Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.

DV video setting

Use this setting to adjust the picture quality of the incoming video from the DV device connected to the DV jack of this recorder.

- HOME MENU Select 'DV', then 'DV Video Setting' from the Home Menu.

For detailed information on this setting, see Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs on page 126.

About DV

Using DV, also known as i.LINK or IEEE 1394-1995, you can connect a DV camcorder to this recorder using a DV cable for input of audio, video, data and control signals. "i.LINK" and the "i.LINK" logo are trademarks.

This recorder is only compatible with DV-format (DVC-SD) camcorders. Digital satellite receivers and Digital VHS video recorders are not compatible.
- You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time to this recorder.
- You cannot control this recorder from external equipment connected via the DV IN jack.
- It may not always be possible to control the connected camcorder via the DV IN jack.
- DV camcorders can usually record audio as stereo 16-bit/48 kHz, or twin stereo tracks of 12-bit/32 kHz. This recorder can only record one stereo audio track. Set the DV Input setting as required (see DVInput on page 133).
Audio input to the DV IN jack should be 32kHz or 48 kHz (not 44.1kHz ).
- Picture disturbance in the recording may occur if the source component pauses playback or plays an unrecorded section of tape, or if the power fails in the source component, or the DV cable is disconnected.
- The DV IN jack is an input only. There is no output functionality.

Note

If the audio subcode on the DV tape cannot be read correctly, the audio type will not switch automatically. You can switch the audio manually from the External Audio setting (page 133).

Chapter 10

Editing

Editing options

The table below shows which commands you can use with the HDD and different disc types.

HDDDVD-R/-RW (Video mode), DVD+R/+RWDVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM (VR mode)
OriginalPlay List
Create (page 102)
Play (page 102)
Erase (page 102)
Edit > Title Name (page 103)
Edit > Set,Thumbsail (page 103)
Edit > Erase Section (page 104)
Edit > Divide (page 105)
Edit > Chapter Edit (page 105)
Edit > Set Genre (page 106)
Edit > Lock (page 107)
Edit > Move (page 107)
Edit > Combine (page 108)
Genre Name (page 108)
Multi-Mode (page 109)
Undo (page 109)● *1● *1

*1 DVD-R/-RW only

The Disc Navigator screen

The Disc Navigator screen is where you can edit video content on unlocalized Video mode and VR mode DVD-R/-RW discs, DVD+R/+RW and DVD-RAM, as well as video content on the hard disk drive.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - The Disc Navigator screen - 1

Important

  • Titles that have been recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder are shown in the Disc Navigator with a blank thumbnail image. See also Additional information about the TV system settings on page 138.
  • During recording, if you display the Disc Navigator for the HDD, some of the titles may appear with a mark. These titles were recorded with a Input Line System setting different to the current setting of the recorder. During recording, these titles cannot be played.

HDD/DVD

1 Select the HDD or DVD.

2 DISNAVIGATOR Display the Disc Navigator screen.

Playback will automatically stop when you do this.

  • The Disc Navigator is also accessible from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DISNAVIGATOR Display the Disc Navigator screen. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DISNAVIGATOR Display the Disc Navigator screen. - 2

Press to display the command menu panel.

Use the / and ENTER buttons to navigate the menus.
- PREV NEXT When in the title list, press to display the previous/next page if there are more titles than can be displayed.
DISPLAY
- Press to change the title information displayed in the title list.

HDD/DVD

Press to switch between the HDD and DVD

Disc Navigator screens.

  • If you are editing a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc you can display the Play List by selecting Play List from the view options panel (press , then select Play List from the view options, then Play List).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DISNAVIGATOR Display the Disc Navigator screen. - 3

  • Titles on the HDD marked with a NEW icon are recently recorded titles that haven't yet been played.

3 DSC (NAVIGATOR) Press to exit the Disc Navigator.

Editing accuracy

Some editing commands ask you whether you want to keep Video mode compatibility or frame accuracy (Video Mode Compatible Editing or Frame Accurate Editing).

Frame accurate editing is very precise. The edit point is accurate to the exact frame you choose. However, this accuracy is not preserved in any copy you make if you use the high-speed copy function to make a Video mode DVD.

Video mode compatible editing is less precise. The edit point you choose will only be accurate to within 0.5 to 1 second. On the other hand, these edit points will be preserved if you use high-speed copy to make a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW.

HDD genres

The large capacity of the HDD means that there may be many hours of video in the recorder. To help you organize your HDD video content you can assign different genres to titles. There are 20 genres in total, including five user-definable ones that you can name as you like.

Create

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this function to create a Play List and add titles to it. Before you can use this command, make sure that the Play List is switched on in the view options panel on the left.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Create - 1

1 Select 'Create' from the command menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Create' from the command menu panel. - 1

2 Select an original title to add to the Play List.

Repeat these two steps to add as many titles as necessary to the Play List.

Play

DVD(Video) DVD(VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Use this function to start playback of a title.

1 Highlight the title you want to play.

2. Select 'Play' from the command menu panel.

Playback of the title you selected starts.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Play' from the command menu panel. - 1

Erase

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

Use this function to erase unwanted titles.

When you erase titles from the HDD or Original titles from a VR mode DVD-RW, the available recording space increases accordingly. Erasing a title from a Video mode DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc increases the available recording time only if it is the last title on the disc.

Erasing Play List titles, or titles from a DVD-R (VR mode or Video mode) or DVD + will not result in any more free space on the disc.

1 Highlight the title you want to erase.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the title you want to erase. - 1

Select 'Erase' from the command menu

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the title you want to erase. - 2

Select 'Yes' to confirm or 'No' to cancel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the title you want to erase. - 3

Tip

  • You can erase a title quickly by pressing CLEAR when the title is highlighted. Confirm the edit by pressing ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Tip - 1

Note

1 There may be cases where erasing a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc will result in incontiguous title numbers.

Title Name

DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM HDD

You can give titles new names of up to 64 characters long for VR mode, DVD-RAM and HDD recordings, and up to 40 characters for Video mode recordings and DVD+R/ ^+ RW discs.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Title Name - 1

Highlight the title you want to name (or

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Title Name - 2

Select 'Edit' > 'Title Name' from the menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Title Name - 3

3

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 3 - 1

Input a name for the selected title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 3 - 2

  • A name generated automatically by the recorder will already be in the name input section of the screen. Use the / buttons to change the cursor position.
  • Select CAPS or small to change to upper or lower-case, or use the CASE SELECTION buttons (PREV/▶NEXT).
  • You can also use the CLEAR button to delete characters directly (press and hold for two seconds to delete the whole name).
  • For discs formatted on a different DVD recorder, you will see only a limited character set.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - 3 - 3

Select 'OK' to enter the name and return in Disc Navigator screen.

  • To return to the main Disc Navigator screen without saving changes to the title name, press RETURN/EXIT.

Set Thumbnail

HDD DVD (Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

You can change the thumbnail picture that appears in the Disc Navigator for a title to any frame that appears in that title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Thumbnail - 1

Highlight the title you want to change. mail picture for.

2 Select 'Edit' > 'Set Thumbnail' from the command menu panel.

The thumbnail setting screen appears from which you can find the frame you want.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Thumbnail - 2

3 Use the playback controls (▶, II, ⇌, ➔, etc.) to find a suitable frame, then press ENTER to set.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Thumbnail - 3

You can also use the chapter and time search features (press PLAY MODE), and the CM SKIP and CM BACK buttons.

  1. Select 'Exit' to return to the Edit screen.

Erase Section

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM

Using this command you can delete a part of a title, ideal for cutting out the commercial breaks in a recording made from the TV.

1 Highlight the title containing the section you want to erase.
2 Select 'Edit' > 'Erase Section' from the command menu panel.

3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Erase Section - 1

  • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 101.

4 Highlight 'From' then use the playback controls (, , , ) to find the start of the section to erase, then press ENTER.

The bar at the bottom of the screen indicates the current play position in the title. After pressing ENTER, a marker shows the start of the section.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Erase Section - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Erase Section - 3

5 Highlight 'To' then, in the same way, find the end of the section to erase, then press ENTER.

After pressing ENTER, another marker indicates the end of the section, with the section itself marked in red.

6 Select 'Yes' to confirm, or 'No' to cancel.

In the thumbnail viewer you can see a few seconds of video either side of the marked section to see how the edit will look.

  • When editing VR mode Original content, you may not be able to erase very short sections (less than five seconds).

Divide

HDD DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this command to divide a title into two. Note that once divided, the two new HDD titles cannot be recombined into one again.

1 Highlight the title you want to divide.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Divide - 1

Select Edit>Divide'from the command el.

3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Divide - 2

  • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 101.

4 Use the playback controls (▶, II, <, >, etc.) to find the place you want to divide the title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Divide - 3

5 ENTER Press to divide the title at the current playback position.

6 Select 'Yes' to confirm or 'No' to cancel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Divide - 4

Note

1 When editing VR mode Original content, it may not be possible to erase chapters less than five seconds long.
2 VR mode Play List only.

Chapter Edit

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM HDD

When editing a VR mode DVD or video on the HDD you can edit individual chapters within a title, with commands for erasing, combining and dividing.

1 Highlight the title that contains the chapters you want to edit.

2 Select 'Edit' > 'Chapter Edit' from the command menu panel.

3 HDD only: Select the type of edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 1

Select 'Edit' > 'Chapter Edit' from the menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 2

HDD only: Select the type of edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 3

  • For more information about these options, see Editing accuracy on page 101.

4 Select the command you want:

  • Divide - Divide a chapter into two or more parts: Use the playback controls (▶, II, <▲, >▼, etc.) to find the point at which you want to divide the chapter, then press ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 5
Chapter Edit (DVD VR mode Play List)
19:00 Mon 29/11 Pr 2 SP
Rec. time
Chapters 5
1h00m
5

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 6
0.00.00
▶ Play

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 7

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 8

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 9
Erase/Move
Combine

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 10

-

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 11

-

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 12

-

You can keep dividing the chapter as many times as you wish (up to 999 chapters per DVD-R/-RW/-RAM disc or 99 chapters per HDD title).

  • Erase ^1 / Move ^2 - Erase or move chapters: Select the chapter you want to erase/move and press ENTER. Select whether you want to erase or move the chapter.

Move command only: Select the destination for the chapter, and press ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 1

  • Combine1 - Combine two adjacent chapters into one: Highlight the bar divider between two adjacent chapters and press ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Chapter Edit - 2

5 Select 'Exit' to get back to the main Disc Navigator screen.

Set Genre

HDD

Use this command to assign a genre to a title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Genre - 1

Highlight the title you want to assign a

2 Select 'Edit' > 'Set Genre' from the command menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Genre - 2

3 Select a genre for the title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Genre - 3

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Set Genre - 4

Note

1 It may not always be possible to combine two chapters, even though they are adjacent. If a chapter has been divided into three, then the middle chapter erased, it is not possible to combine the two remaining chapters into one.

Lock

HDD DVD(Video)DVD(VR)DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

Original only

You can lock a title so that it can't be edited or erased accidentally. If you do need to edit it, you can always unlock it later.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Lock - 1

Important

  • You can't undo any edits made before changing the lock status. You also can't undo a lock/unlock command using the Undo option from the Disc Navigator menu.

1 Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the title you want to lock (or unlock). - 1

Select 'Edit' > 'Lock' from the command list.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Edit' &gt; 'Lock' from the command list. - 1

An unlocked title will become locked; a locked title will be unlocked. Locked titles are shown in the Disc Navigator with a padlock icon.

Move

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this function to re-arrange the playing order of Play List titles.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Move - 1

Highlight the title you want to move.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Highlight the title you want to move. - 1

Select 'Edit' > 'Move' from the command list.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Edit' &gt; 'Move' from the command list. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Edit' &gt; 'Move' from the command list. - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Edit' &gt; 'Move' from the command list. - 3

Select a new position for the title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a new position for the title. - 1

After pressing ENTER, the new, updated Play List is displayed.

Combine

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM Play List only

Use this function to combine two Play List titles into one.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Combine - 1

Highlight the title you want to combine.

This title will remain in the same place after combining with another title.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Combine - 2

2 Select 'Edit' > 'Combine' from the command menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Combine - 3

3 Select another title to combine with the first.

This title will be appended to the first title selected.

The screen below shows title 3 selected to be appended to title 1:

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Combine - 4

4 Select 'Yes' to confirm or 'No' to cancel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Combine - 5

Genre Name

HDD

Use this command to rename one of the five userdefinable genres (Free 1 to Free 5).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre Name - 1

Select 'Genre Name' from the command list.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre Name - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre Name - 3

Select one of the user-definable genre

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre Name - 4

3 Input a name for the genre.

  • The name can be up to 12 characters long.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre Name - 5

4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre Name - 6

Select 'OK' to enter the name and exit.

Multi-Mode

HDD

Multi-Mode allows you to select several titles, then select a command that will be applied to all of them. In this way you can select multiple titles and then erase them all at once, for example.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD - 1
Select 'Multi-Mode' from the command.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD - 2

2 Select titles from the title list.

Selected titles are marked with a

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select titles from the title list. - 1
Select the command that you want all the marked titles.

For example, select Erase to erase all the marked titles.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select titles from the title list. - 2
Once the command is completed, Multi-Mode is automatically exited.

Undo

DVD(Video) DVD (VR) DVD+R DVD+RW

If you make a mistake while editing, you can generally undo it. There is one level of undo (in other words, you can only undo the last edit you made).

Select 'Undo' from the command menu panel.

  • You can't undo anything after exiting the Disc Navigator screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Undo' from the command menu panel. - 1

Frequently asked questions

  • Why doesn't the available recording time increase when I erase titles from a VR mode DVD-R?

When you erase titles from a DVD-R (or DVD+R), the titles are no longer displayed, but the content remains on the disc. DVD-R/+R are write-once media; they can't be erased or rewritten.

I can't edit my disc!

You may find that as the available recording time is reduced on a VR mode DVD-R disc, editing is no longer possible. This is because information about your edits requires a certain amount of disc space. As you edit, this information builds up, eventually preventing you from editing further.

Chapter 11

Copying and backup

Introduction

Use the copying features of this recorder to:

  • Back up important recordings stored on the HDD to a DVD.
  • Make a DVD copy of a recording on the HDD to play in another player.
  • Transfer video from a DVD to the HDD for editing.
  • Transfer edited video from the HDD to DVD.

The simplest way to copy a title is to use the One Touch Copy feature. This copies the currently playing HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to the HDD. See One Touch Copy on page 110 for detailed instructions.

For more sophisticated copying tasks you can build a Copy List of titles to copy, and edit titles so that you only copy the bits you want. See Using Copy Lists on page 111 for detailed instructions.

Where possible, the recorder will copy your recordings at high-speed. Depending on the recording mode, the kind of disc loaded and various other factors, copying can be as fast as one minute per hour of video. See Setting up the remote to control your TV on page 140 for more on copying times.

If you want to save disc space you can copy video at a lower recording quality (for example, an XP recording on the HDD copied to SP on a DVD). Copying in this way is always done in real-time.

When real-time copying from the HDD to a Video mode DVD-R/RW or DVD +R / + RW ,the chapter markers in the original material are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at intervals, according to the Auto Chapter settings (see also Auto Chapter (Video) and Auto Chapter (DVD + R / + RW) on page 135).

Restrictions on copying

Commercial DVD-Video discs are protected using Copy Guard. These discs cannot be copied to the HDD.

Some video material is copy-once protected. This means that it can be recorded to HDD, but it can't then be freely copied again. If you want to transfer copy-once protected material from HDD to DVD, you'll need to a CPRM ver. 1.1 or higher VR mode DVD-RW, ver. 2.0 or 2.1 VR mode DVD-R, or CPRM-compatible DVD-RAM disc (see CPRM on page 79 for more on this). Only one instance of a copy-once protected title can be added to the Copy List, and after it's been copied, the title is erased from the HDD (it is therefore not possible to copy a locked title that is copy-once protected).

You can identify copy-once protected material during playback by displaying disc information on-screen. If the current title is copy-once protected, an exclamation mark (!) is shown.

Recording equipment should be used only for lawful copying and you are advised to check carefully what is lawful copying in the country in which you are making a copy. Copying of copyright material such as films or music is unlawful unless permitted by a legal exception or consented to by the rightowners.

One Touch Copy

  • See also Copyright above.

The One Touch Copy feature copies the currently playing or selected (in the Disc Navigator) HDD title to DVD, or DVD title to HDD. The whole title is copied, regardless of where in the title you start the copy.

HDD to DVD copies are made in the same recording mode. When copying DVD to HDD, the copy is made in whatever recording mode is currently set.

Make sure that a recordable DVD disc is loaded when trying to copy from the HDD.

REC MODE

1 If you're copying from DVD to the HDD, select a recording mode.

Note that selecting a recording mode higher than the title playing will not result in a better quality recording.

ONE TOUCH COPY

2 Press during playback to copy the current title.

The front panel display indicates that the title is being copied.

  • High-speed copying is used when copying from the HDD to DVD. Playback continues while copying.
    Real-time copying is used when copying from DVD to the HDD. Playback restarts from the beginning of the title.

Canceling One Touch Copy

You can cancel a One Touch Copy once it's started.

ONETOUCHOOPY

Press and hold for more than a second.

Copying is canceled and the video already copied is erased.

  • If you cancel a HDD to DVD-R/+R copy, the space available for recording does not return to the precopy figure.

Notes on copying using One Touch Copy

Copying to DVD

  • Title name, chapter markers, as well as thumbnail picture markers for the Disc Navigator, are also copied. However, if you copy to a Video mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD+R/+RW, only the first 40 characters of a name are copied.
  • The chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same positions as the original when recording on to a Video mode DVD-R/RW or DVD+R/+RW.
  • You can't use the One Touch Copy function to copy a title if any part of the title is copy-once protected.
  • A title that contains mixed aspect ratios can't be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-R/ -RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
  • Low resolution (SEP through LP modes ^1 ) widenscreen material can't be copied to a Video mode disc. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW or DVD-RAM disc for this type of material.
  • When HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off, titles recorded in LP/MN9 to MN15 modes cannot be high-speed copied to a Video mode disc. Please use a VR mode DVD-R/RW or DVD-RAM.
  • Recordings of bilingual broadcasts cannot be high-speed copied to a Video mode DVD. Please use a VR mode DVD-R/RW or DVD-RAM.
  • Titles over 8 hours cannot be copied to single-layer DVD+R/+RW discs using One Touch Copy. Use DVD+R DL discs for titles over 8 hours.
  • Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6. SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using One Touch Copy.

Copying to the HDD

  • The maximum title length for copying is 12 hours.
  • Title name and chapter markers are also copied, except when copying from a finalized Video mode disc.
  • Thumbnail picture markers and chapter markers for the Disc Navigator are copied, but their position in the copy may be slightly changed from the original.
  • If some part of the title being copied is copy-protected, copying will start, but the copy-protected portions will not be copied.

Using Copy Lists

  • See also Copyright on page 110.

At its simplest, a Copy List is just a list of HDD or DVD titles that you want to copy. When copying HDD titles to DVD, you can, however, edit the titles in your copy list, erasing chapters you don't need, or re-naming titles, for example. Edits you make to titles in the Copy List do not affect the actual video content; only the 'virtual' content of the Copy List. So you can freely erase and modify anything in your Copy List safe in the knowledge that the actual content is not being altered.

Copying from HDD to DVD

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying from HDD to DVD - 1

Important

  • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
  • The Copy List is erased if the Input Line System setting is changed (see Additional information about the TV system settings on page 138).
  • Resetting the recorder to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 153) will erase the Copy List.

1 Load a recordable DVD.

  • It is possible to complete the following steps without having a recordable DVD loaded (or having an uninitialized DVD loaded); however, the steps are slightly different.
  • If you want to use a DVD-RW (VR mode) disc for the copy, make sure it is initialized before you start.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Load a recordable DVD. - 1

Select 'Copy' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Copy' from the Home Menu. - 1

Select 'HDD DVD'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'HDD  DVD'. - 1

  • If this is the first time to create a Copy List, skip to step 5 below.

4 If there is already a Copy List stored in the recorder, choose whether to 'Create New Copy List' or 'Continue Using Previous Copy List'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'HDD  DVD'. - 2

  • If you select Continue Using Previous Copy List, skip to step 10 below.
  • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder.

5 Add titles to the Copy List (highlight a title and press ENTER to add).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'HDD  DVD'. - 3

Titles you've added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink.

There are some restrictions on titles that can be added to the Copy List if you are copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW:

  • When adding titles that contain copy-once protected material, the copy-once parts will not be added.
  • When adding titles that contain material of more than one aspect ratio (screen size), each part with a different aspect ratio will be added as a separate title if high-speed copying is possible.

Depending on the title1, high-speed copying may not be possible to a Video mode disc.

6 Press to display the command menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'HDD  DVD'. - 4

7 Select 'Next' to move on to the Title Edit screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'HDD  DVD'. - 5

8 To edit a title, highlight it using the / buttons, then press ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'HDD  DVD'. - 6

A menu of editing commands appears:

  • Erase - Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 102).
  • Title Name – Name or rename a title in the Copy List (see Title Name on page 103).
  • Erase Section - Erase part of a title (see Erase Section on page 104).
  • Move - Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 107).

#

Note

1 Widescreen titles recorded at low resolution (SEP through LP/MN1 to MN15 (Video Mode Off) or MN1 to MN8 (Video Mode On).
LP/MN9 to MN15 recordings when HDD Recording Format is set to Video Mode Off.
Bilingual recordings.
- Combined titles that were originally recorded using different recording modes.

Preview-Check the content of a title in the Copy List.
- Divide - Divide a title in the Copy List into two (see Divide on page 105).
- Combine - Combine two titles in the Copy List into one (see Combine on page 108).
- Chapter Edit - Edit chapters within a Copy List title (see Chapter Edit on page 105):
- Divide - Divide a chapter into two.
- Erase/Move - Erase a chapter/Change the chapter order.
- Combine - Combine two chapters into one.
- Set Thumbnail - Set the thumbnail frame for a title (see Set Thumbnail on page 103).
- Recording Mode - Set the picture quality of the copy (see Recording Mode on page 114).
- Bilingual - Set how bilingual audio should be copied when copying from HDD to Video mode DVD (see Bilingual on page 114).
- Cancel - Exit the menu.

Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing.

9

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Note - 1

Display the command menu panel.

10

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Display the command menu panel. - 1

Select 'Next' to proceed.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Next' to proceed. - 1

There are several options available from the next screen:

  • Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 114).
  • Select Input Disc Name if you want to change the disc name. Input a name of up to 64 characters for a VR mode disc or 40 characters for a Video mode disc or DVD+R/+RW. (The input method is similar to that of naming titles; see Title Name on page 103.)
  • Select Finalize if you want to automatically finalize a Video mode DVD or DVD+R after copying.2-Select a title menu style from the following screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Next' to proceed. - 2

Select 'Start Copy' to start copying.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Start Copy' to start copying. - 1

  • If you're using a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc and the copy will span both layers, the Copy List Total bar will be purple.
  • The Current DVD Remain bar will be half-length if the first layer of a DVD-R DL or DVD+R DL disc is already full.

Copying from DVD to HDD

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying from DVD to HDD - 1

Important

  • The DVD to HDD Copy screen isn't accessible when a finalized Video mode disc or a DVD-Video is loaded. As long as the disc is not Copy Guard protected, you can still use the One Touch Copy function, however (See One Touch Copy on page 110).
  • The recorder can only store one Copy List at a time.
  • The Copy List will be erased if:
    • any of the titles on the DVD disc are erased or edited.
    • the disc tray is opened.
    • playback is switched between Play List and Original.
    • the DVD disc is re-initialized or finalized.
    • the recorder is reset to its factory settings (see Resetting the recorder on page 153).
  • It may not be possible to copy from a DVD disc that was recorded on a different DVD recorder or a PC.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

HOME MENU

Select 'Copy' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Copy' from the Home Menu. - 1

Select 'DVD/CD HDD'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'DVD/CD  HDD'. - 1

Select a Copy List type.

  • Selecting Create New Copy List will erase any Copy List already stored in the recorder.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a Copy List type. - 1

Add titles to the Copy List (highlight and press ENTER to add).

Titles you've added to the Copy List are highlighted in pink.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Add titles to the Copy List (highlight and press ENTER to add). - 1

Note

1 Titles recorded in MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP mode cannot be copied to DVD+R/+RW using high-speed copy.
2 If a timer recording is scheduled to start during copying, the disc will not be finalized.

5 Select 'Next' from the command menu panel to proceed to the title edit screen.

6. Select a title to edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a title to edit. - 1

A menu appears of Copy List editing commands:

  • Erase - Erase individual titles from the Copy List (see Erase on page 102).
  • Move - Change the order of titles in the Copy List (see Move on page 107).
    Preview - Check the content of a title in the Copy List.
  • Cancel - Exit the menu.

Repeat this step for as many titles you have that need editing.

7 Select 'Next' from the command menu panel to proceed to the copy options screen.

  • Select Recording Mode if you want to change the recording quality (see Recording Mode on page 114).

8 Select 'Start Copy' to start copying.

Recording Mode

1 Select 'Recording Mode' from the command menu panel.

2 Select a recording mode for the copy.

  • High-Speed Copy ^1 - The Copy List is copied at the same recording quality as the original.
  • XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP, SEP, MN² - The Copy List is copied at the specified recording quality in real-time. (Note that if you copy at a higher quality setting than the original, the copy will not be better quality than the original.)

If you select MN above, you can also change the level setting (MN1 to MN32 or LPCM) from the Recording Quality box that appears.

  • Optimized2,4 - The recording quality is automatically adjusted so that the Copy List fits on to the space available on the disc. Copying is carried out in real-time.

When you change the recording mode setting, you can see how much disc space it will require. If this is more than is available, it shows up in red and you won't be able to start copying. In this case, either change the recording quality, or press RETURN/EXIT to go back to the Copy List screen and erase one or more titles from the Copy List.

Bilingual

1 Select the title containing the audio you want to change.

2 Select 'Bilingual' from the command menu panel.

3 Select a bilingual audio option.

Using disc backup

  • See also Copyright on page 110.

This feature offers a simple way to make a backup copy of a finalized Video mode disc or DVD +R / + RW . The data is copied first to the hard disk drive, then on to another recordable DVD disc.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Copy', then 'Disc backup' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Copy', then 'Disc backup' from the Home Menu. - 1
Select a backup option.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Copy', then 'Disc backup' from the Home Menu. - 2
There are three backup options:

Note

1 When copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/ ^+ RW, the chapter markers in the copy may not be in exactly the same position as the original.
2 When the copy mode is set to something other than High-Speed Copy for copying to a Video mode DVD or DVD+R/+RW, the chapter markers of the original are not copied. Chapter markers are put into the copy at regular intervals, according to the Auto Chapter setting (see also Auto Chapter (Video)) and Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW) on page 135.
3 When copying to a DVD +R / + RW MN1 to MN3 and SEP modes are not available.
4 Optimized mode only available when copying to DVD.
5 It is not possible to play this material directly from the HDD.

  • Start new disc back-up - Start making a backup of a disc.
  • Resume writing data - Record the backup data already on the HDD to a recordable DVD.
  • Erase back-up data - Erase the backup data on the HDD.

3 Load the disc you want to make a backup of.

You can only make backup copies of finalized Video mode discs, finalized DVD+R or DVD+RW discs (excluding DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL discs).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Load the disc you want to make a backup of. - 1

4

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Load the disc you want to make a backup of. - 2

Select 'Start'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Start'. - 1

  • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
  • You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.

5 When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD.

  • If you're using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW, the disc doesn't have to be blank, although the previous contents of the disc will be erased in the backup process.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - When the data has been copied, take out the disc and load a blank* recordable DVD. - 1

You can use a DVD-R ver. 2.0 or 2.1 disc, or DVD-RW ver. 1.1 or ver. 1.2 disc for the backup.

  • If you backup a DVD-R disc to DVD-RW, you cannot undo the finalization later.
    Actual recordable capacity of discs vary so there may be cases where the contents of the disc you're backing-up will not fit on to a particular blank disc. If this happens, please try another brand of disc.
    DVD-R/-RW discs can only be backed up to DVD-R/- RW discs; DVD + / + RW discs can only be backed up to DVD + R / + RW discs.

6 Select 'Start' to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Start' to start writing the backed-up data to the blank disc. - 1

  • To see the progress of the backup, press DISPLAY.
  • You can cancel the backup process by pressing ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second. However, this will make the disc unusable (although if you are using a DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc you can re-initialize it in order to make it usable again—see Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 87.)

7 After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - After the recorder has finished recording the backup disc, you can select whether to make another backup of the same data or exit. - 1

  • Select Start to make another backup copy or Cancel to finish. If you want to make another backup copy, return to step 6 above.

8 If you don't need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now.

Select Yes to delete the data from the HDD; select No to keep it (you can delete it later if you want to).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - If you don't need to keep the backup data on the HDD, you can delete it now. - 1

  • If you decide to leave the backup data on the HDD, you can make backup copies to recordable DVD discs anytime from the Disc Back-up menu.

Chapter 12

Using the Jukebox

The Jukebox feature allows you to use the recorder's HDD to store and playback music from up to 999 of your CDs. You can also transfer WMA/MP3 files stored on CD-R/-RW/-ROM or USB device. Once on the HDD, you can name albums, assign them a genre, and set tracks that you don't want to play to Jump.

Copying music to the HDD

The first step is to copy some music to the HDD. CD audio is copied in real-time, while WMA and MP3 files are copied at high speed. All tracks are copied from each CD^1 as an album.

WMA/MP3 album and track names are copied along with the audio. CD album and track names are not copied, but you can add these later (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 117).

Usually, the tracks are copied to the HDD in the order they appear on the CD. When copying CD audio, you can copy them in some other order using the program play mode. See Program play on page 95 for how to do this.

Note that once copied to the HDD, audio tracks cannot be copied to a recordable DVD disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying music to the HDD - 1

Important

While copying CD audio, no other recorder operation is possible.
- When copying CD audio, scheduled timer recordings will not start until copying is complete.
- Copy protected CDs may not copy successfully.

1 Load the CD you want to copy to the HDD.

2 HOME MENU Select 'Copy' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Copy' from the Home Menu. - 1

Select 'DVD/CD to HDD'.

On pressing ENTER all tracks (or files) on the CD are copied to the HDD.

  • You can also start copying by starting playback of the CD (including program play) and then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY.
  • To cancel copying an audio CD, press and hold ONE TOUCH COPY for more than one second.
  • To cancel copying a WMA/MP3 disc, press ENTER.
  • If the CD loaded contains both CD audio tracks and WMA/MP3 files, the part currently selected will play.

Copying files from a USB device

You can copy WMA or MP3 files from a connected USB device, such as a USB drive, to the HDD.

1 Connect the USB device.
2 HOME MENU Select 'Jukebox' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying files from a USB device - 1

Select 'Listen to Music from USB Device'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying files from a USB device - 2

Select 'Copy Album' from the command list.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying files from a USB device - 3

Select 'Yes' to confirm or 'No' to cancel.

The selected folder on the USB device will be copied to the HDD.

  • Up to 99 folders/999 files on the USB device can be copied/displayed.

Playing music from the Jukebox

You can select albums or individual tracks from the Jukebox to play.2

1 HOME MENU Select 'Jukebox' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Select 'Jukebox' from the Home Menu. - 1

Select a Jukebox option.

  • Listen to Music/Edit - Listen to CDs that have been copied to the HDD.
  • Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit - Listen to WMA or MP3 files that have been stored on the HDD.
  • Listen to Music from USB device - Listen to music from an external USB device.

Note

1 The recorder can copy up to 999 CDs; a CD can contain up to 99 tracks. The recorded audio format is 256 kbps Dolby Digital.

2 The digital audio output contains a copy-prohibit signal when albums are playing from the HDD.

3 Select what you want to play.

The screen below shows CD albums stored on the HDD:

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select what you want to play. - 1

  • If you select a whole album to play, all tracks that are not set to Jump will play.
  • If you want to start playback from a selected track in an album, or play a track that is set to Jump, press to enter the track list then select a track to play.
  • Press SUBTITLE or ANGLE to change the page.

Changing the album view

1 From the album list, display the view options menu panel.

2 Select a view option.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a view option. - 1

From the album list, display the view menu panel.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a view option. - 2

Select a view option.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a view option. - 3

- Sort order

By number - Albums are listed by the album number.

By favorite - Most often listened to music appears at the top of the list.

By album - Albums are listed alphabetically.

Genre

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Genre - 1

All Genres - All albums are displayed.

Genre - Only albums in the selected genre are displayed.

Editing Jukebox albums

A number of commands are available for editing and changing the playback behavior of albums.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Jukebox' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Editing Jukebox albums - 1

2 Select 'Listen to Music/Edit' or 'Listen to Music (WMA/MP3)/Edit'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Editing Jukebox albums - 2

3 Select what you want to edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Editing Jukebox albums - 3

4 Select an edit function from the command menu panel.

  • Erase - Erase the selected track (if all tracks in an album are selected, the whole album is erased).
  • Edit > Edit Title - Enter a name of up to 64 characters for the album. See page Title Name on page 103 for how to enter names.
  • Edit > Set Genre - Set or change the genre for the album.
  • Edit > Jump Set1 - Set a track to jump so that it doesn't play (choose this command again to cancel the Jump setting).
  • Play Mode - Change the playback order for albums and tracks.
    Genre Name - Enter a name of up to 12 characters for a genre. See page Title Name on page 103 for how to enter names.

Chapter 13

The PhotoViewer

From the PhotoViewer you can view JPEG photos and picture files stored on the HDD, recordable DVD or CD-R/-RW/-ROM, or on a USB-equipped digital camera. You can also import files and save them to the recorder's HDD or a DVD-R/-RW disc.

Locating JPEG picture files

1 HOME MENU Select 'PhotoViewer' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locating JPEG picture files - 1

2 Select the location of the files you want to view or edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locating JPEG picture files - 2

View/Edit photos on the HDD - View or edit photos already stored on the recorder's HDD.
View photos on a CD/DVD - View photos on a Fujicolor CD, CD-ROM, CD-R/-RW, or DVD-R/-RW.
View photos on a USB device - View photos on a digital camera (or other USB device) connected to the USB port.
- Copy photos from a USB device - Copy all photos on a connected USB device to the HDD.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locating JPEG picture files - 3

3 Select the folder containing the files you want to view, copy or edit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locating JPEG picture files - 4

If you encounter a disc that will not play, check that the disc and file formats are compatible with this recorder (see JPEG file compatibility and PC-created disc compatibility on page 44).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locating JPEG picture files - 5

Note

Up to 999 files or 99 folders are viewable, but if there are more files/folders than this on the disc or connected USB camera it is still possible to view them all using the Reload function (see Reloading files from a disc or USB device on page 119).

Playing a slideshow

1 Select a folder from the folder list.

The first nine images from the selected folder are displayed as thumbnails in the main part of the screen.

  • The larger the file size, the longer it takes the recorder to load the file.
  • To start the slideshow from the first file in the folder, skip to step 4 after pressing ENTER.

2. Select 'File Selection' from the menu.

The first thumbnail image is highlighted.

  • You can also select a folder, then press to get to the thumbnail view area.
  • To get back to the folder list, press RETURN/EXIT (or when the leftmost thumbnail is highlighted).

3 Select a thumbnail.

  • Use PREV and NEXT to display the previous/next page of thumbnails.

4 Select 'Start Slideshow' from the menu.

  • You can also select a file or folder then press▶ PLAY to start playing the slideshow.
  • Use PREV / NEXT to display the previous/ next picture, or PAUSE to pause the slideshow.
    Depending on the aspect ratio, some pictures may be displayed with black bars top and bottom, or left and right.
    Large picture files may take a few seconds to display. This is normal.
  • During playback of the slideshow you can listen to WMA/MP3 files in the Slideshow genre (see Editing Jukebox albums on page 117).

5 Press to return to the thumbnail view area.

  • You can also use the RETURN/EXIT button.

6 Press to return to the folder view area.

  • With the leftmost thumbnail highlighted, you can use the button.
  • To exit the PhotoViewer, press HOME MENU.

Reloading files from a disc or USB device

If you have a disc with more than 1000 files and/or 100 folders, you can still view all the images using the reload function.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Reloading files from a disc or USB device - 1

1 Navigate to the last entry in the folder list ('Read next: ...').

2 ENTER Load the next batch of up to 999 files/99 folders from the disc or connected USB device.

It will take a moment (at most a few minutes) to load in the images.

Zooming an image

During a slideshow you can zoom in to enlarge a portion of the picture by a factor of two or four. You can also move the area of the picture displayed.

1 ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture.

Repeated presses cycle between zoom off, 2x zoom and 4x zoom. The zoom factor is displayed on-screen.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - ENTER Press during the slideshow to zoom the picture. - 1

2 Use to move the zoomed area.

Rotating an image

You can rotate the displayed picture during a slideshow so you can always view pictures the right way up, whichever way they were taken.

- MAH+SUB+ ANGLE Press during the slideshow to rotate the displayed picture clockwise by 90^

Press repeatedly to continue rotating the picture in increments of 90^ .

Note

1 You can presome HEMe to exit the Poviewer sile thc recorder is reloading images. (if you enter the Poviewer again, it will resume reloading if from a CD or DVD.)

Importing files to the HDD

You can import files and save them on to the HDD from a CD, DVD or a connected USB camera. Once on the HDD you can edit and organize your pictures and print them out if you've connected a PictBridge-compatible printer.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Importing files to the HDD - 1

1 Select the location of folders/files you want to import.

To import a whole folder, press ENTER here and skip to step 4 below.

  • To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select the location of folders/files you want to import. - 1

3 Select a file to import, then press ENTER.

  • To import multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a file to import, then press ENTER. - 1

4 Select 'Copy to HDD' from the menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Copy to HDD' from the menu. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Copy to HDD' from the menu. - 2

5 Select 'Yes' to confirm and copy the folder(s)/file(s), or 'No' to cancel.

  • The files will be copied to the HDD with the same folder structure as the original.
  • Importing to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD, or if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD (999 folders/999 files per folder).

Selecting multiple files or folders

The Multi-Mode allows you to select multiple folders/files at once for importing or editing.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Selecting multiple files or folders - 1

  1. Select the folder containing the files you want to import.

2 Select 'Multi-Mode' from the menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Multi-Mode' from the menu. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Multi-Mode' from the menu. - 2

3 To add a file/folder to the list, select it, then choose 'Select' from the menu.

A checkbox mark () is shown by the item you selected.

  • You can also select a file or folder and press STOP to add it to the list.
  • To remove a file/folder from the list, select Cancel Selection from the menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - To add a file/folder to the list, select it, then choose 'Select' from the menu. - 1

4 (ENTER) Display the command menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - (ENTER) Display the command menu. - 1

  • Select the command you want to apply to selected items.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - (ENTER) Display the command menu. - 2

Note

1 For files you want to keep permanently, we recommend backing up to DVD-R/RW.

Importing files from a USB device

Use this feature to copy all the files on a connected USB device to this recorder's HDD.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Importing files from a USB device - 1

Important

  • After backing up the pictures on your USB device to HDD, we recommend verifying that they have been recorded properly before deleting anything from the camera.

1 Select 'Copy photos from a USB device' from the main PhotoViewer menu.

2 Select 'Yes' to confirm or 'No' to cancel.

While the files are being imported, any timer programs set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible.

Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW

This feature allows you just to copy some of the files stored on HDD to a DVD.

A slideshow of the files is also recorded on the disc as a Video mode title, making it possible to view the photos on other DVD players/recorders that may not be compatible with JPEG file playback. Note however that you may need to finalize the disc before it will play on another DVD player (copying selected files doesn't automatically finalize the disc).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying selected files to a DVD-R/-RW - 1

Important

A maximum of 99 titles can be recorded.
- Slideshow can contain up to 99 files. If there are more files than this in the slideshow, multiple Slideshow are created on the disc.
- If you erase a slideshow title from a DVD the slideshow will become unplayable but the free space will not increase.

1 Load a blank (or unfinalized Video mode) DVD-R or DVD-RW disc.

2 Select 'View/Edit Photos on the HDD'

from the menu.

3 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to

copy.

  • Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
  • To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to - 1

Select 'Copy to DVD' from the menu.

5 Select 'Yes' to confirm or 'No' to cancel.

  • Folder names on the disc will be number PIONR. File names will be PHOT number.
    Note that during copying, any timer programs set to start will not begin, and no other operation is possible.
    While 'Cancel' is displayed, you can press ENTER to cancel.

Editing files on the HDD

There are a number of commands you can use to edit and organize your pictures stored on the HDD.

Creating a new folder

1 (ENTER) From the folder list, display the menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - (ENTER) From the folder list, display the menu. - 1

Select 'New Folder'.

The folder appears at the bottom of the folder list with the name F_number.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'New Folder'. - 1

  • There can be up to 999 folders on the HDD.

Erasing a file or folder

1 Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to erase.

  • To erase multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.
    Erasing a folder will erase all the files contained in it. Please be careful!
  • You can't erase files that have been locked.
  • Folders containing locked files can't be erased. Unlocked files in the folder, however, will be erased.

2 Select 'File Options' or 'Folder Options'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'File Options' or 'Folder Options'. - 1

3 Select 'Erase' or 'Erase Folder'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Erase' or 'Erase Folder'. - 1

4 Select 'Yes' to confirm, or 'No' to cancel.

  • You can also erase a file or folder by pressing CLEAR when the file or folder is highlighted. Press ENTER to confirm.

Copying files

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Copying files - 1

Select the file(s) or folder(s) you want to

  • Copying a folder will copy all the files contained in it.
  • To copy multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.

2 Select 'File Options' or 'Folder Options'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'File Options' or 'Folder Options'. - 1

Select 'Copy' or 'Copy Folder Contents'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Copy' or 'Copy Folder Contents'. - 1

4 Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select a folder to copy the folder(s)/file(s) to. - 1

Select 'Yes' to confirm, or 'No' to cancel.

  • Copying to the HDD will not work if there is insufficient space on the HDD; if there are already the maximum number of files and/or folders on the HDD.

Naming files and folders

1 Select the file or folder you want to rename. You can't rename files that have been locked.
2 Select 'File Options' or 'Folder Options'.
3 Select 'Rename File' or 'Rename Folder'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Naming files and folders - 1

4 Enter a new name for the file/folder.

Filenames or Foldernames can be up to 64 characters long.

Locking/Unlocking files

Locking files will protect them from accidental erasure and prevent them from being renamed.

Use the same process to both lock and unlock files. Locked files are displayed in the PhotoViewer with a padlock icon.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locking/Unlocking files - 1

  • To lock/unlock multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locking/Unlocking files - 2

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Locking/Unlocking files - 3

Select the file(s) you want to lock (or

Select 'File Options' or 'Folder Options'.

Select 'Lock' or 'Lock Folder Contents'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select the file(s) you want to lock (or - 1

Locked files are shown with a padlock icon next to them.

Printing files

Connecting a PictBridge-compatible printer to the USB port will enable you to print out picture files ^1 stored on the HDD, or directly from a digital camera.

Make sure that the printer (and your digital camera if you are using that as a source) is connected to the recorder before starting.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Printing files - 1

1 Select the file(s) you want to print.

  • To print multiple folders, use the Multi-Mode; see Selecting multiple files or folders on page 120.

2 Select 'Print' from the menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Print' from the menu. - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Print' from the menu. - 2

It takes a moment for the recorder to communicate with the printer. During this time you can press ENTER to cancel the print.

3 Select 'Start' to confirm, or 'Cancel' to cancel.

  • Once printing has started, you can cancel by pressing ENTER.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select 'Start' to confirm, or 'Cancel' to cancel. - 1

Tip

  • Paper size and layout can be set; the options available depend on your printer—check the printer manual for details.
  • If the message Searching for printer. Please wait a moment continues to be displayed, try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable.
  • This recorder may not work correctly with all printers.

Chapter 14

The Disc Setup menu

From the Disc Setup menu you can name discs, lock the contents to prevent accidental recording and erasure, initialize and finalize discs. The Disc Setup menu is accessed from the Home menu:

Basic settings

Input Disc Name

DVD(VR) DVD(Video) DVD+R DVD+RW DVD-RAM

When you initialize a disc for recording, the recorder automatically assigns a name for the disc ranging from DISC 1 to DISC 99. You can use the Input Disc Name function to change the default disc name to something more descriptive. This name appears when you load the disc and when you display disc information on-screen.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Input Disc Name - 1
Screen'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Input Disc Name - 2

3 Input a name for the disc.

The disc name can be up to 64 characters long for a VR mode disc, or 40 for a Video mode discs and DVD+R/+RW.

  • See Title Name on page 103 for more on navigating the input screen.

Lock Disc

DVD (VR) DVD-RAM

  • Default setting: Off

Locking the disc will prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc.

Important

  • A locked disc can still be initialized (which will completely erase the disc).

1 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1
Select 'Basic' > 'Lock disc' then 'On' or 'Off'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 2

Set to On to prevent accidental recording, editing or erasing of the disc loaded. If you need to unlock the disc to make edits, select Off.

Initialize settings

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+RW DVD-RAM

You can initialize a recordable DVD-R/-RW disc for either VR mode or Video mode recording.

The first time you load a new DVD-RW disc, it will be automatically initialized for recording according to the DVD-RW Auto Init. setting in the Initial Setup menu (see page 135).

New DVD-R discs are ready for Video mode recording when you load them, but it is also possible to initialize them for VR mode recording.

DVD+RW and DVD-RAM discs can also be initialized as a way of erasing the entire disc. When initializing a DVD-RAM disc, select VR mode.

See Initializing recordable DVD discs on page 87 for detailed instructions.

Note

1 Once initialized for VR mode recording it is not possible to re-initialize the disc for Video mode recording. Also, once recorded in Video mode, the disc cannot be re-initialized for VR mode recording.

Finalize settings

Finalize

DVD-R DVD-RW DVD+R DVD+RW

Finalizing 'fixes' the recordings in place so that the disc can be played on a regular DVD player or computer equipped with a suitable DVD-ROM drive.

It is also possible to finalize DVD+RW discs. This is only necessary if you want to a player to display a title menu for the disc.

See Playing your recordings on other DVD players on page 86 for detailed instructions.

Undo Finalize

DVD-RW

You can undo the finalization on DVD-RW discs recorded on this recorder in Video mode. You need to do this if you want to record more material or edit material already on the disc.

You can also undo the finalization of VR mode discs which have been finalized on other DVD recorders. If when you load a disc the message This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization is displayed, use this command to be able to record on the disc using this recorder.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - DVD-RW - 1

Select 'Finalize' > 'Undo Finalize' then 'Start'.

Optimize HDD

HDD

As you record, erase and edit recordings, the HDD file system gradually becomes fragmented. Periodically, the HDD will need optimizing to 'clean up' all the fragmented files.

When the HDD needs optimizing the recorder will automatically display a message recommending optimization.

Important

  • Optimizing the HDD can take as long as eight hours. During optimization, playback and recording are not possible.

  • Canceling optimization mid-way does not undo the optimization already done, so the HDD will be partly optimized.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

2 Select 'Optimize HDD' then 'Start'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Important - 1

A progress bar indicates how long there is left to go.

Initialize HDD

HDD

When your DVD recorder is working without a problem this option is not visible in the Disc Setup menu. However, if the HDD file system becomes corrupted for some reason, you can initialize the HDD to fix the problem. Note that initializing the HDD will erase all the data on it.

1 HOME MENU Select 'Disc Setup' from the Home Menu.

2 Select 'Initialize HDD' then 'Start'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HDD - 1

Chapter 15

The Video Adjust menu

Using the Video Adjust menu you can set up the picture quality for the built-in tuner and external inputs, for disc playback, and for recording.

Setting the picture quality for TV and external inputs

Picture Creation lets you choose a set of picture quality settings for the built-in TV tuner and for each external input. There are several preset settings that suit various sources, or you can create up to three of your own sets.

Choosing a preset

1 HOME MENU With the recorder stopped, press to display the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choosing a preset - 1

  • Select the DV input by selecting DV then DV Video Setting from the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choosing a preset - 2

3 Select a preset.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choosing a preset - 3

  • Use the Video In button to switch between the built-in TV tuner and the external inputs (not possible if you selected DV Video Setting in step 2 (above)).
  • Use the IPREV/NEXT buttons to change the channel of the built-in TV tuner.

There are six presets available:

  • Tuner - suitable for general TV broadcasts
    VCR - suitable for video cassettes
  • DTV/LDP - suitable for digital broadcasts and Laserdiscs
    Memory1-user preset 1
    Memory2-user preset 2
    Memory3-user preset 3

You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset (Tuner, VCR or DTV/LDP).

Creating your own set

There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings.

1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 1
Select 'Detailed Settings'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 2

3 Select the setting you want to adjust.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 3

You can adjust the following settings:

  • Prog. Motion - Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive.
  • PureCinema - This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto; but try switching to Off if the picture appears unnatural.
  • 3-D Y/C - Adjusts the brightness / colour separation (NTSC video input only).
  • YNR - Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component.
    CNR - Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component.
  • White AGC - Turn on for automatic white level adjustment.1
  • White Level - Adjusts the intensity of white.
  • Black Level - Adjusts the intensity of black.
  • Black Setup - Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video input only).

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 4

Note

1 When White AGC is On, the White Level setting can't be adjusted.

  • Hue - Adjusts overall balance between red and green.
  • Chroma Level - Adjusts how rich the colours appear.

4 Adjust the currently selected setting.

5 HOME MENU Press to exit.

You can now use the preset for any other input or the built-in TV tuner.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - HOME MENU Press to exit. - 1

Tip

  • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust.

Setting the picture quality for disc playback

This setting determines how the picture will look when playing discs.

Choosing a preset

1 HOME MENU With a disc playing (or paused), press to display the Home Menu.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choosing a preset - 1

2

Select 'Video Adjust'.

3

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choosing a preset - 2

Select a setting.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Choosing a preset - 3

There are six presets available:

TV - suitable for LCD and cathode-ray tube TVs
- PDP - suitable for plasma display screens
Professional - suitable for professional monitors
- Memory1 - user preset 1
Memory2-user preset 2
Memory3-user preset 3

You can press DISPLAY to see the individual settings for the current preset (TV, PDP or Professional).

Creating your own set

There are three user presets in which you can save your own set of picture quality settings for disc playback.

1 Follow Choosing a preset above and select one of the user presets (Memory 1, 2 or 3).
2 Move the cursor down and select 'Detailed Settings'.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 1

3 Select the picture quality setting you want to adjust.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 2

You can adjust the following settings:

  • Prog. Motion - Adjusts the motion and still picture quality when video output is set to progressive. (Prog. Motion is ineffective when PureCinema is On.)
  • PureCinema - This setting optimizes the picture for film material when the video output is set to progressive. Usually set to Auto 1 but try switching to Auto 2. On or Off if the picture appears unnatural.
  • Subtitle Adjust - When the video output is set to progressive scan, it's possible that the subtitles in some movies will disappear unnaturally. In this case select the On setting (only possible when connected using HDMI).
  • YNR - Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the Y (brightness) component.
    CNR- Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the C (colour) component (only possible when connected using HDMI).
  • BNR - Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the block noise (artefacts visible in areas of flat colour, caused by MPEG compression).
  • MNR - Adjusts the amount of noise reduction (NR) applied to the mosquito noise (artefacts visible around the edges of an image, caused by MPEG compression).
  • Sharpness - Adjusts the sharpness of the high-frequency (detailed) elements in the picture.
  • Detail - Adjusts how sharp edges appear.
  • White Level - Adjusts the intensity of white.
  • Black Level - Adjusts the intensity of black.
  • Black Setup - Corrects the standard reference black level (NTSC video playback on the Interlace video output setting only). (Black Setup is ineffective for HDMI output.)
  • Gamma Correction - Adjusts the brightness of darker images.
  • Hue - Adjusts overall balance between red and green.
  • Chroma Level - Adjusts how rich the colours appear.

4 Use the / buttons to adjust the currently selected picture quality setting.
5 When you have all the settings as you want them, press HOME MENU to exit.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Creating your own set - 3

  • To see more of the picture as you adjust different settings, press ENTER after selecting the setting you want to adjust.
  • YNR and Detail are ineffective for analog and component video when the Video Priority Mode is set to HDMI. Set to Component to make effective for both analog and HDMI video. See page 137.

Chapter 16

The Initial Setup menu

Using the Initial Setup menu

The Initial Setup menu is where you can set various recorder options for sound, picture, language and so on.

Some settings can only be changed when the recorder is stopped. During playback and recording these settings are grayed out in the Initial Setup menu.

Except for the Setup Navigator, menu screens are exited automatically after 20 minutes of inactivity.

- Press HOME MENU and select 'Initial Setup'.

In the table below, the default option is marked with a .

SettingOptionsExplanation
Basic
Clock SettingAutoSet the channel that broadcasts a clock signal and the clock will be set automatically.
Manual •If there is no channel that broadcasts a clock signal in your area, you can set the time and date manually.
• If any digital TV channels are set then the clock will automatically be set. • The clock must be set in order to use timer recording.
Input Line System525 SystemUse for NTSC or PAL-60 recording from an external input.
625 System •Use for standard PAL or SECAM recording.
• This setting is applicable only when recording from an external input. • See also About the input line system on page 138 for more information on this setting.
Power SaveMode 1Only signals arriving at the antenna input are passed through to the antenna output when the recorder is in standby.
Mode 2No input signals are passed through to the outputs when the recorder is in standby.
Off •When the recorder is in standby, all signals arriving at the SCART and antenna inputs are passed along to the outputs.
HELP SettingOn •Switches on the automatic Help screens for GUI displays.
OffSwitches off the automatic Help screens for GUI displays. (Press HELP on the remote to manually display the Help screen.)
EPG Type SelectGUIDE Plus+Use the Gemstar GUIDE Plus+ EPG.
Digital EPGUse the EPG based on information provided by D.TV broadcasts.
Pause Live TVTV's Tuner •Allows you to use the Pause Live TV feature with an AV Link-compatible TV connected by SCART cable.
Recorder's TunerAllows you to use Pause Live TV with this recorder's internal TV tuner.
See also Pause Live TV on page 83 for more information on this setting.
Setup NavigatorStartSelect to start the Setup Navigator. See also Switching on and setting up on page 56.
Digital Tuner
Replace ChannelsNext ScreenScans for digital channels and replaces all the channel presets with the results. Before the scan starts you will need to select your country. After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found, and if so, how many.(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no channels are set.)
If you execute a Replace Channels command, any timer recordings set for D.TV channels will be erased.
Add New ChannelsNext ScreenAutomatically scans for new digital channels. After the scan is complete the recorder tells you whether any new channels were found, and if so, how many.(You can cancel the scan before it has finished by pressing HOME MENU or RETURN/EXIT. In this case, no new channels are set.)
Channel SortNext ScreenUse this screen to sort channel presets into your preferred order. Use the ↑/↓/←/→ buttons to highlight the channel you want to move, press ENTER.Use the cursor buttons again to highlight the position you want to move the channel preset to, then press ENTER again.(If there are more channel presets than will fit on one screen, you can select the next/previous page by highlighting the small triangular marks and pressing ENTER.)
Channel OptionsNext ScreenFrom this screen you can skip or lock channels. Locked channels will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be watched. Use the ↑/↓/←/→ buttons to highlight a preference box and press ENTER to toggle the preference.To enter this screen, input the parental lock password when prompted (if one has not yet been set then the password you enter becomes the parental lock password).
Auto SkipOff •No channels are automatically skipped.
RadioRadio channels are skipped when selecting channels.
DataData channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Radio & DataRadio and data channels are skipped when selecting channels.
Signal CheckNext ScreenUse this screen to check the signal level and quality of digital channels.Use the ←/→ buttons to change the RF channel; select Add New Channels then press ENTER to scan for new channels; press HOME MENU to exit.
Aerial PowerOnPower is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) when this recorder is on or in standby.
AutoPower is supplied to the connected aerial (antenna) only when this recorder is on.
Off •This recorder does not supply power to the connected aerial (antenna).
• If the setting keeps reverting to Off when you try to set to On or Auto, the aerial may not be connected properly, or it may be shorted. In either case, check the connection and try making the setting again.
D.TV LanguageNext ScreenFrom this screen you can set your Primary and Secondary Audio preference for multilingual digital broadcasts, and your Primary and Secondary Subtitle preference for programs that are broadcast with subtitles. Use the ↑/↓ buttons to highlight a field then use the ←/→ buttons to change it.
Analog Tuner
Auto Channel SettingAuto ScanSelect your country and then wait for the recorder to auto tune into channels in your area. After auto scan has finished, the channel mapping screen appears showing which channels have been assigned to which program numbers. You can skip unwanted channels using the Manual CH Setting option below.Press HOME MENU to exit the channel mapping screen.
Download from TVIf your TV supports this feature you can download all the channels that your TV is tuned to via the SCART input. Select your country and then wait for the download to complete. After the download is complete, the channel mapping screen appears, as above.See also the operating instructions that came with your TV for more information.
Manual CH SettingNext ScreenProceed to the next screen if you need to adjust any of the settings made by auto tuning. Select your country, then proceed to the manual channel setting screen:·Change channel presets using the iPREV/▶iNEXT buttons.·To skip the displayed channel (because there is no station assigned to that channel), change the Skip setting to On.·Set the CH SYSTEM setting to match the channel system of your country or region.·Set the CHANNEL setting to the channel you want to assign to the current channel preset.·To manually fine tune the channel, change the AFT setting to Off then adjust the Level setting.·Set the Sound System setting to match the sound system of your region.·The Name field allows you to input a name of up to five characters for the current channel preset.If the currently selected channel is scrambled requiring a decoder connected to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER), set the Decoder setting to On.
Channel SwappingNext ScreenProceed to the next screen to swap channel assignments of different presets so that you can group together presets that naturally go together. Select two presets to swap then press ENTER.
Video In/Out
Input Colour SystemNext ScreenProceed to the next screen to set the input colour system for the external input and the built-in TV tuner. Use theVIDEO IN buttons to change the preset or external input. On the default Auto setting the recorder can generally correctly detect whether the input signal is PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC or PAL-60, but in some cases you may have to set it manually if the picture is displayed incorrectly.
· Input Colour System cannot be set when the recorder is in D.TV mode. · See also About the input colour system on page 139 for more information on this setting.
Component Video OutInterlaceSelect if your monitor/TV is not compatible with progressive-scan video.
ProgressiveSelect if your monitor/TV is progressive-scan compatible. Check the operating instructions that came with your monitor/TV if you're not sure.
For Component Video Out to be effective, the AV1 Out setting (see below) must be set to something other than RGB. If your TV is incompatible with progressive scan video and you select Progressive, you will not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the ■ (STOP) button on the front panel to switch to Interlace (this also switches Screen Resolution on page 137 to the default setting). When an HDMI device is connected and Video Priority Mode is set to HDMI, the Component Video Out setting is automatically set to Interlace.
AV1 OutVideo •Sets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to standard composite video (compatible with all TVs).
S-VideoSets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to S-video. Recommended if you are using a long SCART cable.
RGBSets the AV1(RGB)-TV SCART output to RGB. Good quality but check your TV for compatibility. Note that on this setting signals from the built-in tuner and from external inputs is not output when the recorder is in TV mode.
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case either switch off and reconnect using the supplied video cable, or reset the recorder (see Resetting the recorder on page 153). The Component Video Out setting (see above) has no effect when AV1 Out is set to RGB.
AV2/L1 InVideo •Sets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to standard composite video.
S-VideoSets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to S-video.
RGBSets the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART input to RGB.
DecoderUse this setting if you connected a decoder to the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) SCART connector. For scrambled channels, make sure that the channel Decoder setting is set to On. (See Manual CH Setting page 131.)
When the Input Line System is set to 525 System, RGB cannot be selected. Even when set to RGB, depending on the connected device, the input signal may be composite video.
NTSC on PAL TVOn •NTSC discs will play correctly on PAL-only TVs.
OffUse if your TV is already NTSC-compatible.
Many recent PAL TVs are compatible with NTSC input and so this setting can be switched off. Check the operating instructions that came with your TV. See also About NTSC on PAL TV on page 138 for related information.
Audio In
NICAM SelectNICAM •Record the NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast.
Regular AudioRecord the non-NICAM audio in a NICAM broadcast. (You can still switch the audio to record using the AUDIO button before recording.)
Analog Tuner LevelNormal •Standard setting.
CompressionUse if the audio level from the built-in tuner is excessive, causing distortion.
External AudioStereo •Select if the audio from the currently selected external input is standard stereo.
BilingualSelect if each channel carries a separate soundtrack.
When the external audio is from the DV input, an audio subcode channel within the DV audio tells the recorder whether the audio is stereo or bilingual. This has priority over the setting you make here.
Bilingual RecordingA/L •Record the left (A) channel of a bilingual source when recording to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode On, to DVD in Video mode or in LPCM mode, from an external source.
B/RAs above, but for right (B) channel recording.
When recording bilingual audio to DVD in VR mode (except in LPCM mode), or to HDD with HDD Recording Format set to Video Mode Off (except in LPCM mode), both audio channels are recorded and you can switch to the one you want on playback.
DV InputStereo 1 •Select to use the 'live' audio track (recorded during the video shoot) from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
Stereo 2Select to use the overdubbed audio track from a camcorder that supports two stereo audio tracks.
MixSelect one of the three settings to use a mix of the two stereo audio tracks.
Audio Out
Dolby Digital OutDolby Digital •Output a Dolby Digital signal when a Dolby Digital source is being played.
Dolby Digital → PCMConvert Dolby Digital sources to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn't have a Dolby Digital decoder.
DTS OutOn •Output a DTS signal when a DTS source is being played.
OffSwitch off the digital output when a DTS source is being played. Use when your connected equipment doesn't have a DTS decoder. In this case, use the analog audio outputs.
96 kHz PCM Out96 kHz → 48 kHz •Convert 96 kHz digital audio sources to 48 kHz output. Use if your connected equipment doesn't support 96 kHz sampling rate.
96 kHzOutput 96 kHz digital audio when a 96 kHz source is being played.
MPEG OutMPEGOutput an MPEG audio signal when a source using MPEG audio is being played.
MPEG → PCM •Convert sources with MPEG audio to Linear PCM output. Use if your connected equipment doesn't have an MPEG audio decoder.
Audio DRCOnSwitches on Audio DRC (Dynamic Range Control). Use when listening to Dolby Digital material at low volume.
Off •Switches off Audio DRC.
Audio DRC is not effective when listening via the digital output when the Dolby Digital Out setting is set to Dolby Digital. In this case adjust the dynamic range from the receiver subwoofer—see Dynamic Range Control on page 29.
Language
OSD LanguageEnglish •Sets the language of the on-screen displays to English.
available languagesChoose from the languages displayed for the on-screen displays.
On Screen Display and D.TV Language will both reflect this setting.
Audio LanguageEnglish •Sets the default audio language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languagesChoose from the languages displayed to set the default audio language for DVD-Video playback.
OtherSelect to set the default audio language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 139.
Discs do not necessarily have audio in your selected language. Also, some discs override the Audio Language preference.
Subtitle LanguageEnglish •Sets the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback to English.
available languagesChoose from the languages displayed to set the default subtitle language for DVD-Video playback.
OtherSelect to set the default subtitle language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 139.
Discs do not necessarily have subtitles in your selected menu language. Also, some discs override the Subtitle Language preference.
Auto LanguageOn •On this setting: • DVD-Video discs whose main audio track is in your default language will play using that language, without subtitles. • Discs whose main audio track is not in your default language but that have a subtitle track in your default language will play the original audio track with subtitles.
OffSelect to play DVD-Video discs according to your audio and subtitle language preferences.
For Auto Language to be effective, the Audio Language and Subtitle Language options must be set to the same language.
DVD Menu Languagew/Subtitle Language •Sets the language of DVD-Video menus to the same as that set for the subtitle language.
EnglishSets the language of DVD-Video menus to English.
available languagesChoose from the displayed languages to set the default language for DVD-Video menus.
OtherSelect to set the DVD menu language to something other than the ones listed. See Selecting other languages for language options on page 139.
Discs do not necessarily have menus in your selected menu language.
Subtitle DisplayOn •Select to have discs display subtitles according to your Subtitle Language and Auto Language preferences.
OffSelect to switch off subtitle display.
Assist SubtitleSelect to display special additional assistive subtitles, where available.
Some discs may override these settings.
Recording
Manual RecordingOn (go to setup)All the standard recording modes, plus MN1 to MN32 and LPCM modes can be set.
Off •Just the standard recording modes (XP, SP, LP, EP, SLP and SEP) can be set.
See also Manual recording modes on page 143 for detailed information on manual recording levels.
Optimized RecOnThe recording quality of timer recordings is automatically adjusted to fit on to the selected media if it will not fit at the selected quality setting. If the recording will not fit even at MN1(MN4 for DVD+R/+RW), then the recording will start at MN1 and stop when all the available space is used up.
Off •When a timer recording is set that won't fit on to the selected media, the recording starts but is cut off when no more recording is possible.
Optimized Rec will only compensate for the next scheduled timer recording if more than one is set. It cannot be used together with VPS/PDC.
Subtitle RecordingOnThe selected subtitle language is recorded with the D.TV timer recording.
Off •No subtitles are recorded with D.TV timer recordings.
Set Thumbsail0 seconds •Sets the default thumbnail picture in the Disc Navigator to the first frame of the title.
30 secondsSets the default thumbnail picture to 30 seconds into the title.
3 minutesSets the default thumbnail picture to 3 minutes into the title.
Auto Chapter (Video)No SeparationAutomatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •When recording in Video mode, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutesChapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
This settings applies to recording or real-time copying to Video mode DVD-R/RW discs.
Auto Chapter (DVD+R/+RW)No SeparationAutomatic chapter marking is switched off.
10 minutes •When recording in DVD+R/+RW, chapter markers are inserted every 10 minutes.
15 minutesChapter markers are inserted every 15 minutes.
DVD-RW Auto Init.VR Mode •Blank DVD-RW discs are initialized for VR mode recording when loaded into the recorder for the first time.
Video ModeBlank DVD-RW discs are initialized for Video mode recording.
HDD Recording FormatVideo Mode OffRecordings made to the HDD are made in VR mode. Use this setting if you don't need to transfer the recording later to a Video mode DVD.
Video Mode On •Recordings made to the HDD are compatible with Video mode recordings. This setting is convenient if you want to transfer the recording to a Video mode DVD as high-speed copy can be used.
When Video Mode On is used, you must select the audio channel you want to record when recording a bilingual broadcast. On the Video Mode Off setting, both channels will be recorded and you can switch between them on playback. See also Bilingual Recording on page 133.
Playback
TV Screen Size4:3 (Letter Box)Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the letter box format pre-mentation for widescreen material.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)Select if you have a standard 4:3 TV and prefer the pan and scan presenta-tion for widescreen material.
16:9 •Select if you have a widescreen 16:9 TV. Your TV settings determine how 4:3 material will look.
Selecting 4:3 (Letter Box) or 4:3 (Pan & Scan) does not guarantee that all video material will be presented in that format as some discs override this setting.
Still PictureFieldProduces a stable, generally shake-free image.
FrameProduces sharp image, but may be prone to shake.
Auto •Generates a generally less sharp but more stable still image.
Seamless PlaybackOnPlayback is smooth, but with a trade-off against the accuracy of the edit points.
Off •You may notice momentary interruption at edited points during playback of a VR mode Play List.
This setting applies to HDD, DVD-R/-RW (VR) and DVD-RAM playback.
Angle IndicatorOn •A camera icon appears on-screen during multi-angle scenes on a DVD-Video disc.
OffNothing is indicated on-screen when a multi-angle scene is showing.
Parental Lock
Set Password / Change PasswordNext ScreenIf no password has yet been set, enter a four digit number to become your password. If you want to change the password, first enter your old password, then enter a new one.
DVD PlaybackNext ScreenFrom this screen, first enter your password and then set a parental lock level for playback of DVDs with parental level coding.
D.TV Age LimitNext ScreenUse this screen to enter an age limit for D.TV programs. Programs that are broadcast with age suitability guidelines that fall above the age set here will require the correct password to be entered before the channel can be viewed.You must also enter your password in order to change the age limit setting.
This setting is only applicable when the country is set to France, Denmark, Finland or Sweden.
HDMI Output (only available when an HDMI device is connected)
Screen Resolution1920 x 1080iConstant 1920 x 1080i output.
1280 x 720pConstant 1280 x 720p output.
720 x 576pConstant 720 x 576p output (for use with the 625 input line system).
720 x 480pConstant 720 x 480p output (for use with the 525 input line system).
720 x 576iConstant 720 x 576i output (for use with the 625 input line system).
720 x 480iConstant 720 x 480i output (for use with the 525 input line system).
If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the STOP button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 132 to the default setting).
4:3 Video OutputFullSelect if your HDMI TV allows you to change the aspect ratio.
NormalSelect if your HDMI TV does not allow you to change the aspect ratio. 4:3 video will be shown with bars on each side (unless the Screen Resolution setting (above) is set to 720 x 480i or 720 x 576i).
ColourRGB (0-255)Use if colours are weak and black appears to 'float' on the RGB (16-235) setting.
RGB (16-235)Use this setting if colours appear overly rich and the black too deep on the RGB (0-255) setting.
YCbCr 4:2:2The video signal is output as a 10-bit YCbCr 4:2:2 component signal. This is the standard setting for HDMI-compatible devices.
YCbCr 4:4:4The video signal is output as a 8-bit YCbCr 4:4:4 component signal.
• Depending on the connected device some settings may not be available. • When a DVI device is connected, the YCbCr 4:2:2 and YCbCr 4:4 options are not available.
Audio OutputAuto •Dolby Digital, MPEG and DTS sources are output as a bitstream signal. However, depending on the Audio Out setting, number of audio channels, and the HDMI-connected device, Linear PCM audio may be output.
PCMAll audio signals are converted to Linear PCM (except DTS).
Bitstream PrioritySelect if the connected device is compatible with bitstream audio.
This setting is not available when a DVI device is connected.
Video Priority ModeHDMI •Select for high quality picture output on a connected HDMI display. However, on this setting the YNR and Detail picture quality settings are not effective for analog video, and component video will be set to interlaced.
ComponentSelect if you want the YNR and Detail picture quality settings to be effective for both HDMI and analog video output, or if Component Video Out is set to Progressive while an HDMI display is connected (page 132). When watching video on an HDMI display, use the HDMI setting.
Options
On Screen DisplayOn •The recorder displays operation displays (Stop, Play, etc.) on-screen.
OffSwitches off the on-screen operation displays.
Front Panel DisplayOn •The time is shown in the front panel display when the recorder is in standby.
OffThe front panel display is switched off in standby (although it still lights dimly when setting a timer recording).
Remote Control ModeRecorder 1-3 (default: Recorder 1)If you are using more than one recorder in the same room, set them to different IDs. This setting sets the recorder ID; to change the remote controller ID, press and hold RETURN/EXIT then press 1, 2 or 3 to set. The remote will only control a recorder with the same ID.
AV. LinkThis Recorder Only •Signals received through the AV input when the recorder is in standby are not passed through to the AV output.
Pass ThroughSignals received when in standby are passed though to the output for connected devices. (Note that during EPG data download, the EPG data is not passed through.)
When set to Pass Through, make sure to set Power Save (page 129) to Off.
DivX VODRegistration CodeUse to display the recorder's DivX registration code. See DivX video com-patability on page 43 and DivX® VOD content on page 43.
Set Preview (HDD only)Quick Preview •When in the Disc Navigator, the thumbnail video plays short excerpts from throughout the selected title. (Note that edited titles that will play normally from the beginning.)
NormalThe thumbnail video plays from the beginning of the title.
CI InformationNext ScreenThis option displays a menu of CI card functions. Consult your service provider for more information on the functions available.
Software UpdateNext ScreenThe Software Update function can check for and download updated system software for the digital tuner. See Using Software Update (Digital tuner) on page 139.

Additional information about the TV system settings

About the input line system

This recorder is compatible with PAL, SECAM, 3.58 NTSC and PAL-60 TV systems. The Input Line System and Input Colour System settings determine how the recorder treats incoming video signals from an external input. Please note the following points when changing the input line system:

  • When the current input is a built-in tuner channel preset, changing the input line system will usually also affect the input line system of the AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER) input. However if the AV2/L1 In setting is set to Decoder, then the L2 input is affected instead.
  • If, when the Input Line System setting is changed, the screen goes blank (due to incompatibility with your TV), you can switch back by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then pressing Video IN (also front panel) while the recorder is stopped.
  • When you switch the Input Line System setting the Copy List is erased. If you switch the setting using the STOP button andVIDEO IN buttons as described above, there is no confirmation, so please use with care.

  • You can't mix recordings of different TV line systems on the same disc.

  • When you change this setting, the Input Colour System setting also changes (see below).

About NTSC on PAL TV

Depending on the Input Line System setting and the NTSC on PAL TV setting, the signal format output when the recorder is stopped varies as shown in the table below.

Input Line SystemNTSC on PAL TVOutput when stopped
625 SystemOffPAL
OnPAL
525 SystemOffNTSC
OnPAL-60

About the input colour system

The available options of the Input Colour System setting depend on the Input Line System setting. The table below shows the different options available.

Input Line SystemBuilt-in analog tunerExternal input
625 SystemAutoAuto
PALPAL
SECAMSECAM
525 Systemn/aAuto
3.58 NTSC
PAL-60

Additional information about component video output

If you switch the Component Video Out setting to Progressive when using a TV that is not compatible with progressive-scan video, you will not be able to see anything displayed on your TV. If this happens, press and hold the STOP button on the front panel, then press ONE TOUCH COPY. This will set the recorder's video output back to Interlace.

Selecting other languages for language options

1 Select 'Other' from the language list.

This option appears in the settings for DVD Menu Language, Audio Language, and Subtitle Language.

2 Select the language you want.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select the language you want. - 1
Select the language you want.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Select the language you want. - 2

  • Select by language name: Use the / buttons to change the language.
  • Select by code number: Press then use the number buttons to enter the four-digit language code.

See Language code list on page 150 for a list of available languages and corresponding codes.

Using Software Update (Digital tuner)

The Software Update function can keep the built-in digital tuner up to date with the latest system software. You can either check for updates manually, or have the recorder do it automatically at regular intervals.

Access the Software Update screen from the Options menu.

There are three options available: Manual Update, Auto Update and Technical Information.

Manual Update

Select Manual Update to check for updated software immediately. If new software is found then it is automatically downloaded and installed. The new software will take effect the next time the recorder is powered on.

If for some reason the new software could not be downloaded successfully, a dialog box informs you of the error. Press HOME MENU to exit or RETURN/EXIT to return to the previous screen.

Note that channel information may be erased when software update is used, and that timer recording will not work during the update.

To cancel manual update before it has completed, press HOME MENU.

Auto Update

By default, the Auto Update option is On, which means that periodically the recorder will check for and update the digital tuner software if it's available. We recommend that you leave this option On.

If new software is found and successfully downloaded, the recorder automatically scans for new digital channels, informing you if any are found (this is the equivalent of using the Add New Channel option, found in the Digital Tuner section of the Initial Setup menu).

Technical Information

This displays the current hardware and software version numbers of the digital tuner.

Chapter 17

Additional information

Setting up the remote to control your TV

You can use the supplied remote to control your TV. To be able to use this feature you first have to program the remote with a maker code from the table on the following page.

1 Switch on your TV.

2 Press and hold down the CLEAR button, then enter the maker code for your TV.

See the table on the next page for the list of maker codes. If there is more than one code given for your make, input the first one in the list.

  • If the maker's name of your TV doesn't appear in the table, you will not be able to use this remote to control your TV.

3 Point the remote towards your TV and press to check that the remote works with your TV.

If the remote is set up correctly, the TV should switch off. If it doesn't and there is another code given for your maker, repeat step 1 with a new code.

Using the TV remote control buttons

The table below shows how to use this remote control with your TV.

ButtonWhat it does
Press to switch the TV on/off (standby)
INPUTPress to change the TV's video input
VOLUME +/-Use to adjust the TV volume
CHANNEL +/-Use to change TV channels

TV Preset code list

Please note that there are cases where only certain functions may be controllable after assigning the proper preset code, or the codes for the manufacturer in the list will not work for the model that you are using.

ACURA 644

ADMIRAL 631

AIWA 660

AKAI 632,635,642

AKURA 641

ALBA 607,639,641,644

AMSTRAD 642,644,647

ANITECH 644

ASA 645

ASUKA 641

AUDIOGONIC 607,636

BASIC LINE 641, 644

BAUR 631,607,642

BEKO 638

BEON 607

BLAUPUNKT 631

BLUE SKY 641

BLUE STAR 618

BPL 618

BRANDT 636

BTC 641

BUSH 607, 641, 642, 644, 647

656

CASCADE 644

CATHAY 607

CENTURION 607

CGB642

CIMLINE 644

CLARIVOX 607

CLATRONIC 638

CONDOR 638

CONTEC 644

CROSLEY 632

CROWN 638,644

CRYSTAL 642

CYBERTRON 641

DAEWOO 607,644,656

DAINICHI 641

DANSAI 607

DAYTON 644

DECCA 607,648

DIXI 607,644

DUMONT 653

ELIN 60

ELITE 641

ELTA 644

EMERSON 642

ERRES 607

FERGUSON 607,636,651

FINLANDIA 635,643,655

FINLUX 632,607,645,648

653,654,655

FIRSTLINE 640,644

FISHER 632, 635, 638, 645

FORTMENTI 632,607,642

FRONTECH 631,642,646

FRONTECH/PROTECH 632

FUJITSU 648,629

FUNAI 640,646,658

GBC632,642

GE601,608,607,610,617,602,628,618

GEC 607,634,648

GELOSO 632,644

GENEXXA 631,641

GOLDSTAR 610,623,621,602,607,650

GOODMANS 607,639,647,648,656

GORENJE 638

GPM 641

GRAETZ 631,642

GRANADA 607,635,642,643,648

GRADIENTE 630,657

GRANDIN 618

GRUNDIG 631,653

HANSEATIC 607,642

HCM 618,644

HINARI 607,641,644

HISAWA 618

HITACHI 631,633,634,636,642,643,654

606,610,624,625,618

HUANYU 656

HYPSON 607,618,646

ICE 646,647

IMPERIAL 638,642

INDIANA 607

INGELEN 631

INTERFUNK 631, 632, 607, 642

INTERVISION 646,649

ISUKAI 641

ITC 642

631,632,642

JEC 605

JVC613,623

KAISUI 618,641,644

KAPSCH 631

KENDO 642

KENNDy 632,642

KORPEL 607

KOYODA 644

LEYCO 607,640,646,648

LIESENK&TTER 607

LOEWE 607

LUXOR 632,642,643

M-ELECTRONIC 631,644,645,654,655

656,607,636,65

MAGNADYNE 632,649

MAGNAFON 649

MAGNAVOX 607,610,603,612,629

MANESTH 639,646

MARANTZ 607

MARK 607

MATSUI 607,639,640,642,644,647,648

MEDIATOR 607

MEMOREX 644

METZ 63

MINERVA 631,653

MITSUBISHI 609,610,602,621,631

MULTITECH 644,649

NEC 659

NECKERMANN 631,607

NEI 607.642

NIKKAI 605,607,641,646,648

NOBLIKO 649

NOKIA 632,642,652

NORDMENDE 632,636,651,652

OCEANIC 631,632,642

ORION 632,607,639,640

OSAKI 641,646,648

OSO 641

OSUME 648

OTTO VERSAND 631,632,607,642

PALLADIUM 638

PANAMA 646

PANASONIC 631,607,608,642,622

PATHO CINEMA 642

PAUSA 644

PHILCO 632

PHILIPS 631,607,634,656

PHOENIX 632

PHONOLA 607

PROFEX 642,644

PROTECH 607,642,644,646,649

QUELLE 631,632,607,642,645,653

R-LINE 607

RADIOLA 607

RADIOSHACK 610,623,621,602

RBM 653

RCA 601, 610, 615, 616, 617, 618, 661, 662
609

REDIFFUSION 632,642

REX631,646

ROADSTAR 641,644,646

SABA 631, 636, 642, 651

SAISHO 639,644,646

SALORA 631, 632, 642, 643

SAMBERS 649

SAMSUNG 607,638,644,646

SANYO 635,645,648,621,614

SBR 607,634

SCHAUBLORENZ 642

THOMSON 636,651,652,663

THORN 631,607,642,645,648

TOMASHI 618

TOSHIBA 605,602,626,621,653

TOWADA 642

ULTRAVOX 632,642,649

UNIVERSUM 631, 607, 638, 642, 645, 646.

654,655

VESTEL 607

VICTOR 613

VOXSON 631

WALTHAM 643

WATSON 607

WATT RADIO 632,642,649

WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 607

YOKO 607,642,646

ZENITH 603,620

PIONEER 600,631,632,607,636,642,651

Minimum copying times

The table below shows the minimum HDD to DVD copying time for one hour of video.

Please note that not all discs are compatible with high-speed copying. Check with the disc manufacturer for compatibility.

Rec modeDVD disc type
DVD-R / 1xDVD-RW / 1xDVD-RW / 2xCDVD-R DLDVD-RAM / 2xDVD+R / 2.4xCDVD+RW / 2.4xCDVD+R DLDVD-RAM / 3xCDVD-RAM / 5xDVD-R / 4xCDVD-RW / 4xCDVD+R / 4xCDVD+RW / 4xDVD-R / 8x /16xCDVD-RW / 6xCDVD+R / 8x /16xCDVD+RW / 8x
1x2x2.4x3x4x6x
SEP10 h6 mins.3 mins.*12 mins.1.5 mins.*11.25 mins.*1
SLP8 h7.5 mins.4 mins.*12.5 mins.2 mins.*11.6 mins.*1
EP6 h10 mins.5 mins.*13.5 mins.2.5 mins.*12.2 mins.*1
LP4 h15 mins.7.5 mins.6.3 mins.5 mins.4 mins.3 mins.
SP2 h30 mins.15 mins.12.5 mins.10 mins.7.5 mins.5.5 mins.
XP1 h60 mins.30 mins.25 mins.20 mins.15 mins.11 mins.

Note that all times in the above table are approximate. Also that actual copy speed varies with the part of the disc being recorded. *1 Titles recorded on DVD+R/++RW in SEP, SLP or EP modes cannot be high-speed copied.

Manual recording modes

The table below shows the approximate recording times for the HDD and the different DVD types in each manual recording mode, as well as the standard recording mode equivalents.

Video mode Off (HDD) VR mode (DVD)Video mode On (HDD) Video mode (DVD), DVD+R/+RW
Resolution*1LevelRec. timeLevelRec. timeResolution*1
352 x 240/ 352 x 288MN 1802 mins.MN 1 *2,3802 mins.
MN 2720 mins.MN 2 *2,3720 mins.
MN 3600 mins.SEPMN 3 *2,3600 mins.352 x 240/ 352 x 288
MN 4480 mins.SLPMN 4 *3480 mins.
MN 5420 mins.MN 5 *3420 mins.
MN 6360 mins.EPMN 6 *3360 mins.
352 x 480/ 352 x 576MN 7300 mins.MN 7300 mins.352 x 480/ 352 x 576
MN 8270 mins.MN 8270 mins.
480 x 480/ 480 x 576MN 9240 mins.LPMN 9240 mins.
MN 10230 mins.MN 10230 mins.
MN 11220 mins.MN 11220 mins.
544 x 480/ 544 x 576MN 12210 mins.MN 12210 mins.
MN 13200 mins.MN 13200 mins.
MN 14190 mins.MN 14190 mins.
MN 15180 mins.MN 15180 mins.
720 x 480/ 720 x 576MN 16170 mins.MN 16170 mins.
MN 17160 mins.MN 17160 mins.
MN 18150 mins.MN 18150 mins.
MN 19140 mins.MN 19140 mins.720 x 480/ 720 x 576
MN 20130 mins.MN 20130 mins.
MN 21120 mins.SPMN 21120 mins.
MN 22110 mins.MN 22110 mins.
MN 23105 mins.MN 23105 mins.
MN 24100 mins.MN 24100 mins.
MN 2595 mins.MN 2595 mins.
MN 2690 mins.MN 2690 mins.
MN 2785 mins.MN 2785 mins.
MN 2880 mins.MN 2880 mins.
MN 2975 mins.MN 2975 mins.
MN 3070 mins.MN 3070 mins.
MN 3165 mins.MN 3165 mins.
MN 3261 mins.XPMN 3261 mins.
LPCM61 mins.LPCM61 mins.

1 The first figure refers to when the Input Line System is set to 525 System; the second when set to 625 System.
2 Modes MN1 to MN3 not available when using DVD+R/+RW.
*3 Titles recorded at MN6 or lower cannot be high-speed copied to DVD + R/ + RW .

  • Levels separated by a bold line show where there is a noticeable change in picture quality.
    Audio recording in all manual recording modes is in Dolby Digital 2 ch format, except for LPCM mode, which is in Linear PCM format.
  • When recording to the HDD, recording for the times given will use approximately 4.7 GB of HDD space (equivalent to one recordable DVD).
    See also Recording on page 78.

Troubleshooting

Incorrect operation is often mistaken for trouble and malfunction. If you think there is something wrong with this component, please check the points below. Sometimes the trouble may lie in another component. Investigate the other components and electrical appliances being used. If the trouble cannot be rectified even after checking the points below, ask your nearest Pioneer authorized service center or your dealer to carry out repair work.

General

ProblemRemedy
The disc is automatically ejected after closing the disc tray·Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 41).·Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).·Take out the disc and clean it (page 152).·Check that the disc has a region code compatible with the recorder.
Can't play a disc·Check that the disc is a compatible format disc (page 41).·Take out the disc and clean it (page 152).·Check that the disc is loaded properly (aligned in disc tray and label-side up).·There may be condensation in the recorder. Leave the recorder for an hour or so for the condensation to evaporate.During HDD recording, you can't play discs that are recorded with a Line System different to the current recorder setting.DVD+R/+RW discs recorded using another recorder with copy-once protected recordings will not play in this recorder.
Can't record a disc·Check that the disc is not an incompatible format disc (page 41).·Some DVD-RAM discs are not recordable until they have been initialized (page 87).This can take up to 1 hour.
No picture·Check that everything is connected properly (page 46).·Check that the connected TV and/or the AV amp/receiver is set to the correct input.The recorder may be set to progressive scan with an incompatible TV. Reset to interlace by pressing and holding the front panel STOP button then pressing ONE TOUCH COPY.If you are using an indoor antenna that requires power, make sure that Aerial Power in the Initial Setup menu is set to On or Auto (page 130).·If the aerial/antenna is not connected properly, or if it is shorted, the Aerial Power setting will revert to Off automatically. Check the aerial connection and try making the setting again.
All settings are reset·If the recorder is unplugged (or there is a power failure) while the recorder is on, all the settings will be lost.Make sure that you switch the recorder into standby before unplugging the power cord.
Remote control does not work·If you connected this recorder to the receiver subwoofer using the CONTROL IN jack, point the remote control at the display unit of the receiver subwoofer to use (page 14).·Set the remote control to the same ID number as the recorder (page 138). (When the batteries run down, the remote mode is automatically reset to Recorder1.)·Use the remote within its operating range (page 14).·Replace the batteries (page 15).
No sound or sound is distorted·Make sure that the receiver subwoofer or TV is set to the correct input and the volume turned up. ·There is no sound when the picture is paused, or during scanning or slow motion play. Press▶PLAY to resume regular playback. ·DTS audio can only be played back if the recorder's digital output is connected to the receiver subwoofer. If connected to your TV, your TV must have a DTS decoder for you to be able to enjoy DTS sound. ·Some 96 kHz discs do not output audio through the digital jack. ·Check the audio cable connections (page 46). ·If the sound is distorted, try cleaning the cable plugs.
Cannot switch a bilingual program·During real-time copying it is not possible to switch audio channels. The main and sub channels are both output.
The picture from the external input is distorted·If the video signal from the external component is copy-protected, you cannot connect via this recorder. Connect the component directly to your TV.
The picture is distorted·Change the Input Line System setting (page 138). (You can also change it by pressing the■STOP button and INPUT SELECT on the front panel simultaneously with the recorder stopped.)
Screen is stretched vertically or horizontally·Make sure that the TV Screen Size setting (page 136) is correct for the kind of TV you have (see also page 151). ·If you have a widescreen TV, check its aspect ratio settings. ·This recorder's input switches into wide mode automatically according to the input signal. When the unit connected is not compatible with VIDEO ID-1 (widescreen signalling), set the connected component to output 4:3 aspect ratio (standard) video.
Can't play a disc recorded using this recorder on another player·If the disc was recorded in Video mode or DVD+R, make sure that it's finalized (page 86). ·Some players will not play recordable DVD discs, even when recorded in Video mode and finalized. ·If the disc was recorded in VR mode, the other player must be specifically RW compatible in order to play it (page 41). ·Discs recorded with copy-once material cannot be played on non-CPRM compatible players (page 79). ·DVD+RW discs containing only a small amount of recorded material may not play on other players. Finalize the disc and try again.
During playback the picture is dark or distorted·When a copy-protected disc is played via a VCR, the picture will not display correctly. Connect the recorder directly to your TV.
Can't record or does not record successfully·Check that there is some remaining blank space on the DVD/HDD. ·For a Video mode disc or DVD+R, check that the disc isn't already finalized. ·Check the limits on the number of titles and chapters on a disc: -HDD: 999 titles -VR mode: 99 titles, 999 chapters per disc -Video mode disc: 99 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title -DVD+R/+RW: 49 titles per disc, 99 chapters per title (max 254 chapters per disc) ·Check that the source you are trying to record is not copy protected. ·For a VR formatted disc, check that the disc isn't locked (page 124). ·Check that you are recording with the same TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) as the disc has already been recorded in. All recordings on a disc must be in the same TV system. When recording to the HDD, it is also necessary to set the Input Line System setting to match what you want to record (page 138). ·The power may have failed during recording.
Timer program doesn't record successfully·When setting the recording channel, make sure you set the recorder's built-in TVtuner, not the TV's built-in tuner. ·When recording to a Video mode disc, programs that are copy- once protected cannot be recorded. Use a VR mode formatted disc for copy- once material (page 79). ·Two timer programs may have overlapped, in which case only the earlier one will record completely. ·The power may have failed during recording.
After briefly unplugging or after a power failure the front panel display shows '---'·A backup battery inside the recorder keeps the clock and other settings from being reset when there is no power to the recorder. After unplugging or a power failure, the battery keeps all settings for a period of several minutes. Reset the clock and other recorder settings to use the recorder again.
Front panel display shows 'LOCK' when a button is pressed·The Child Lock is on; turn off in order to use the recorder (page 71).
Can't use One Touch Copy (HDD to DVD)·Make sure that there is a recordable DVD-R/-RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 99 titles already on the disc. Also make sure that for a Video mode disc or a DVD+R, the disc isn't finalized. ·Make sure there is a recordable DVD+R/+RW loaded with some free space for recording and fewer than 49 titles already on the disc. ·If you delete a title from a DVD+R/+RW disc, the number of remaining recordable titles may not decrease. ·Further recording is not possible on a finalized DVD+R. Check that there isn't a disc menu on the disc you're trying to use. ·If the title currently playing contains material that is copy- once protected, One Touch Copy will not work. ·One Touch Copy can't be used for titles over 8 hours long when copying to DVD+R/+RW (though you can use a DVD+R DL). ·One Touch Copy can't be used for MN1 to MN6, SEP, SLP or EP titles when copying to DVD+R/+RW. ·One Touch Copy doesn't work if the recorder is already recording to DVD.
Can't use One Touch Copy (DVD to HDD)·Make sure that there is space available on the HDD and that there are fewer than 999 titles on the HDD. ·One Touch Copy doesn't work if the recorder is already recording to the HDD.
The picture freezes and the front panel and remote control buttons stop working·Press STOP then try restarting playback. ·Press the front panel STANDBY/ON button to switch the power off, then switch back on and restart playback. If the power fails to switch off, press and hold STANDBY/ON for 5 seconds until the power switches off.
A device connected via USB does to function.·Check that it is a device that may be connected to this unit (digital camera, USB memory, memory card reader or printer). ·Use a USB cable less than 5 m in length. ·Check that the USB cable is inserted fully. ·Check that the USB device is powered on. ·Only the first digital camera, USB memory or memory card reader connected is readable by this unit. Unplug multiple devices and connect the device you want to use first.

HDMI

ProblemRemedy
The connected HDMI or DVI device does not display any picture (and the front panel HDMI indicator does not light)·Try disconnecting then reconnecting the HDMI cable (while the power of both components is on). ·Try switching the power of the HDMI/DVI device off then back on. ·Try switching off the HDMI/DVI device and this recorder. Next, switch on the HDMI/DVI device and leave it for around 30 seconds, then switch on this recorder. ·When you connect an HDMI-compatible device make sure of the following: - The connected device's video input is set correctly for this unit. - The cable you're using is fully HDMI-compliant. Using a non-standard cable may result in no picture being output. - Don't use several HDMI cables connected together. Use a single cable to connect devices together. ·When you connect a DVI-compatible device make sure of the following: - The connected device's video input is set correctly for this unit. - The DVI terminal on the connected device is HDCP-compatible. - The connected device is compatible with NTSC (720 x 480i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i) and PAL (720 x 576i/p, 1280 x 720p, 1920 x 1080i) video input. ·If the HDD is damaged or broken, there will be no HDMI output. ·Not all HDCP-compatible DVI devices will work with this recorder.
No video from the HDMI output.If you choose a setting that is incompatible with your TV you may not be able to see any picture at all. In this case, press ONE TOUCH COPY while holding down the ■ (STOP) button on the front panel to switch the setting (this also switches Component Video Out on page 132 to the default setting).
There's no sound from the connected HDMI or DVI device.·There is no sound when using a DVI terminal. ·Some HDMI-compatible devices do not output sound (check with the manual that came with the connected device).

If the unit does not operate normally due to external effects such as static electricity, disconnect the power plug from the outlet and insert again to return to normal operating conditions.

On-screen displays and recorder displays

The table below shows a list of error messages that you may encounter when using the recorder and an explanation of their meaning.

MessageExplanation/Action
• Initializing disc. Please wait a moment.When you load a blank DVD-RW or DVD+RW disc, the recorder automatically initializes it.
• Incompatible region number.The disc loaded has an incompatible region number for the recorder and so will not play.
• Cannot record any more titles. • No more space for file management data.The disc control data limit has been reached, or the maximum number of chapters and/or titles has been reached. Erase titles/chapters or combine chapters.
• This disc cannot be recorded. Undo the finalization.The disc was finalized on a non-Pioneer DVD recorder. Undo the finalization in order to recording/editing.
• Cannot play this disc. • This disc cannot be recorded. • Cannot read the CPRM information. • Could not record the information to the disc. • Cannot edit. • Could not initialize disc. • Could not complete finalization successfully. • Could not undo finalization successfully. • Could not successfully unlock the disc.The disc may be dirty or damaged. Take out the disc, clean it and retry. If the error persists, use a new disc. If the error appears even with a new disc, please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Incompatible or unreadable disc.The disc loaded is a playback-only disc type. This display may also appear if the disc is dirty or damaged.
• Cannot record to a disc that is not CPRM compatible. • Cannot record this content using Video mode recording. • This video cannot be recorded to DVD+R/+RW.The video source is copy-once protected. Use a VR mode DVD-R/-RW disc with CPRM for recording.
• This content is copy protected.The video source is copy-protected and cannot be recorded.
• Incorrect CPRM information.The recorder could not read the CPRM information. The recorder may be damaged—please consult a Pioneer Service Center.
• Repairing disc. • Repairing the HDD.During recording, the power was cut. This display appears when the power is restored.
• Could not repair the disc.The recorder was unable to repair the disc after a power cut. The contents of the recording will be lost.
• Overheating has stopped operation. Press DISPLAY to clear message.The internal temperature of the recorder has exceeded the operating limit. If this message reappears, please contact a Pioneer authorized service center.
• HDD optimization is recommended. This can be done using Disc Setup.The HDD should be optimized (basically, HDD housekeeping) to maintain playback and recording performance.
• Please perform HDD optimization. This can be done using Disc Setup.The HDD is in more urgent need of optimization in order to maintain performance.
• The HDD has not been sufficiently optimized. Please optimize again.If this message appears repeatedly after optimizing the HDD it is likely that there is not enough free space on the HDD for optimization to complete properly. Please erase some titles from the HDD and optimize again.
·This channel's TV system is different from the recorder's setting.The TV system (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the current channel is different from the TV system settings of this recorder.
·Recording failed due to a TV system mismatch. Press DISPLAY to clear message.The timer recording failed because the TV system of the channel set for recording was different from the setting of the recorder.
·Playback has stopped because the TV system is different than the recording.During recording or timer recording standby, the TV System (PAL, NTSC, etc.) of the playback video changed, causing playback to stop automatically.
·You are not allowed to watch this Conditional Access Program.A CA module or smart card (obtained from your service provider) is required to watch the selected program. Insert the supplied module or card into the Common Interface card slot on the rear of the recorder (page 47).
·There is no DV input or the input signal is unrecordable.No signal was detected at the DV IN jack. This may appear if a blank section of DV tape is playing in the connected camcorder.
·No DV camcorder connected.The camcorder is not connected properly, or the camcorder is switched off.
·You cannot connect more than one DV camcorder at a time.This recorder's DV jack supports connection to just one camcorder.
·Cannot operate the DV camcorder.This recorder cannot operate the DV camcorder. Try switching off the camcorder then turn it back on again.
·Could not operate the DV camcorder.This recorder was not able to operate the DV camcorder.
·The DV camcorder is not set for playback. Please select playback mode on the DV camcorder.The camcorder is in camera mode. Switch it to playback mode.
·Searching for a printer. Please wait a moment. To cancel, press ENTER.This message is displayed when the recorder is scanning for a connected printer, or when the printer is not yet ready for printing. If there is no printer connected, please connect one. If the message does not disappear, try disconnecting then reconnecting the USB cable. (Note that this recorder may not work correctly with all printers.)
·The printer is not ready or is not connected. Please check the printer.This message is displayed when communication could not be established with the printer. See the Troubleshooting section if you do not know the cause.
·Printing has been canceled because ...This message is displayed when there is a printer error during printing. After checking the printer for the cause of the error, either reconnect the printer and start the printing job again, or select "Yes" to resume printing (select "No" to cancel the print job). See also the operating instructions that came with your printer for possible causes of print errors.

Language code list

Language (Language code letter), Language code

Japanese (ja), 1001

English (en), 0514

French (fr), 0618

German (de), 0405

Italian (it), 0920

Spanish (es), 0519

Chinese (zh), 2608

Dutch (nl), 1412

Portuguese (pt), 1620

Swedish (sv), 1922

Russian (ru), 1821

Korean (ko), 1115

Greek (el), 0512

Afar (aa), 0101

Abkhazian (ab), 0102

Hungarian (hu), 0821

Armenian (hy), 0825

Interlingua (ia), 0901

Interlingue (ie), 0905

Inupiak (ik), 0911

Indonesian (in), 0914

Icelandic (is), 0919

Hebrew (iw), 0923

Yiddish (ji), 1009

Javanese (jw), 1023

Georgian (ka), 1101

Kazakh (kk), 1111

Greenlandic (kl), 1112

Cambodian (km), 1113

Kannada (kn), 1114

Kashmiri (ks), 1119

Kurdish (ku), 1121

Kirghiz (ky), 1125

Latin (la), 1201

Lingala (In), 1214

Laotian (lo), 1215

Lithuanian (lt), 1220

Latvian (lv), 1222

Malagasy (mg), 1307

Maori (mi), 1309

Macedonian (mk), 1311

Malayalam (ml), 1312

Mongolian (mn), 1314

Moldavian (mo), 1315

Marathi (mr), 1318

Malay (ms), 1319

Maltese (mt), 1320

Burmese (my), 1325

Nauru (na), 1401 Thai (th), 2008

Nepali (ne), 1405

Norwegian (no), 1415

Occitan (oc), 1503

Oromo (om), 1513

Oriya (or), 1518

Panjabi (pa), 1601

Polish (pl), 1612

Pashto,Pushto (ps),1619

Quechua (qu), 1721

Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813

Kirundi (m), 1814

Romanian (ro), 1815

Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823

Sanskrit (sa), 1901

Sindhi (sd), 1904

Sangho (sg), 1907

Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908

Sinhalese (si), 1909

Slovak (sk), 1911

Slovenian (sl), 1912

Samoan (sm), 1913

Shona (sn), 1914

Somali (so), 1915

Albanian (sq), 1917

Serbian (sr), 1918

Siswati (ss), 1919

Sesotho (st), 1920

Vietnamese (vi), 2209

Volapuk (vo), 2215

Wolof (wo), 2315

Xhosa (xh), 2408

Yoruba (yo), 2515

Zulu (zu), 2621

Country/Area code list

Country/Area, Country/Area code, Code letter

Argentina, 0118.ar

Australia, 0121, au

Austria, 0120, at

Belgium, 0205, be

Brazil, 0218, br

Canada, 0301, ca

Chile, 0312.d

China, 0314, cn

Denmark, 0411, dk

Finland, 0609, fi

France, 0618.fr

Germany, 0405, de

Hong Kong, 0811, hk

India, 0914, in

Indonesia, 0904, id

Italy, 0920.it

Japan, 1016.jp

Korea, Republic of, 1118, kr

Malaysia, 1325, my

Mexico, 1324, mx

Netherlands, 1412, nl

New Zealand, 1426, nz

Norway, 1415, no

Pakistan, 1611, pk

Philippines, 1608. ph

Portugal, 1620, pt

Russian Federation, 1821, ru

Singapore, 1907, sg

Spain, 0519, es

Sweden, 1905, se

Switzerland, 0308, ch

Taiwan, 2023, tw

Thailand, 2008, th

United Kingdom, 0702,gb

USA,2119,us

Screen sizes and disc formats

When viewing on a standard TV or monitor
Screen format of discSettingAppearance
16:94:3 (Letter Box)The program is shown in widescreen with black bars at the top and bottom of the screen.
4:3 (Pan & Scan)The sides of the program are cropped so that the picture fills the whole screen.
4:34:3 (Letter Box) 4:3 (Pan & Scan)The program is presented correctly on either setting.
When viewing on a widescreen TV or monitor
Screen format of discSettingAppearance
16:916:9The program is presented in widescreen.
4:316:9Your TV will determine how the picture is presented— check the manual that came with the TV for details.

Handling discs

When holding discs of any type, take care not to leave fingerprints, dirt or scratches on the disc surface. Hold the disc by its edge or by the center hole and edge.

Damaged or dirty discs can affect playback and recording performance. Take care also not to scratch the label side of the disc. Although not as fragile as the recorded side, scratches can still result in a disc becoming unusable.

Should a disc become marked with fingerprints, dust, etc., clean using a soft, dry cloth, wiping the disc lightly from the center to the outside edge. Do not wipe with a circular motion.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Handling discs - 1

If necessary, use a cloth soaked in alcohol, or a commercially available CD/DVD cleaning kit to clean a disc more thoroughly. Never use benzine, thinner or other cleaning agents, including products designed for cleaning vinyl records.

Storing discs

Although CDs and DVD discs are more durable than vinyl records, you should still take care to handle and store discs correctly. When you're not using a disc, return it to its case and store upright. Avoid leaving discs in excessively cold, humid, or hot environments (including under direct sunlight).

Don't glue paper or put stickers onto the disc, or use a pencil, ball-point pen or other sharp-tipped writing instrument. These could all damage the disc.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Storing discs - 1

For more detailed care information see the instructions that come with discs.

Do not load more than one disc into the recorder.

Damaged discs

Discs spin at high speed inside the recorder. If you can see that a disc is cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged, don't risk using it; you could end up damaging the recorder.

This recorder is designed for use with conventional, fully circular discs only. Use of shaped discs is not recommended for this product. Pioneer disclaims all liability arising in connection with the use of shaped discs.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Damaged discs - 1

Cleaning the pickup lens

The DVD recorder's lens should not become dirty in normal use, but if for some reason it should malfunction due to dust or dirt, consult your nearest Pioneerauthorized service center. Although lens cleaners are commercially available, we do not recommend using them since some may damage the lens.

Condensation

Condensation may form inside the recorder if it is brought into a warm room from outside, or if the temperature of the room rises quickly. Although the condensation won't damage the recorder, it may temporarily impair its performance. For this reason you should leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about an hour before switching on and using.

Hints on installation

We want you to enjoy using this unit for years to come, so please bear in mind the following points when choosing a suitable location for it:

Do...

Use in a well-ventilated room.
Place on a solid, flat, level surface, such as a table, shelf or stereo rack.

Don't...

× Use in a place exposed to high temperatures or humidity, including near radiators and other heat-generating appliances.
× Place on a window sill or other place where the recorder will be exposed to direct sunlight.
× Use in a dusty or damp environment or in a room where it will be exposed to excessive cigarette smoke.
× Place directly on top of an amplifier, or other component in your stereo system that becomes hot in use.
× Use near a television or monitor as you may experience interference—especially if the television uses an indoor antenna.
× Use in a kitchen or other room where the recorder may be exposed to smoke or steam.
× Use on a thick rug or carpet, or cover with cloth—this may prevent proper cooling of the unit.
× Place on an unstable surface, or one that is not large enough to support all four of the unit's feet.

Moving the recorder

If you need to move the recorder, first remove the disc, if loaded, and close the disc tray. Next, press STANDBY/ON to switch the power to standby, checking that the POWER OFF indication in the display goes off. Wait at least two minutes. Lastly, disconnect the power cord. Never lift or move the unit during playback or recording—discs rotate at a high speed and may be damaged.

Resetting the recorder

If you need to, you can reset the recorder to all its factory settings.

1 Make sure that the recorder is on.
2 Using the front panel controls, press and hold STOP and press STANDBY/ON.

The recorder turns off with all settings reset.

Specifications

General

Power requirements 220 V-240 V, 50/60 Hz

Power consumption. .52 W

Power consumption in standby mode. 0.98 W (Front panel display: off)

Weight. 4.8 kg

Dimensions . . . .420 mm (W) x 79 mm (H) x 319 mm (D)

Operating temperature +5^ to +35^

Operating humidity . . . . . . 5 % to 85 % (no condensation)

TV system . . . . PAL/SECAM/NTSC (external input only)

Readable discs

DVD-Video, DVD-RW, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD+RW, DVD-RAM, Video CD, Super VCD, CD, CD-R/-RW (WMA, MP3, JPEG, CD-DA, DivX)

Recording discs and formats

DVD-R/-RW: VR mode and Video mode

DVD + R / + RW : +VR mode

DVD-RAM: VR mode

DVD-R DL: VR mode and Video mode

DVD+R DL: +VR mode

Video recording format

Sampling frequency. 13.5 MHz

Compression format . MPEG

Audio recording format

Sampling frequency. 48 kHz

Compression format . . . . . Dolby Digital or Linear PCM

(uncompressed)

Recording time

HDD (160 GB)

Fine (XP) Approx. 34 h

Standard Play (SP). Approx. 68 h

Long Play (LP) Approx. 136 h

Extended Play (EP). Approx. 204 h

Super Long Play (SLP). Approx. 272 h

Super Extended Play (SEP) Approx. 340 h

Manual Mode (MN) Approx. 34 h to 455 h

DVD-R/-RW, DVD+R/+RW, DVD-ram

Fine (XP) Approx. 1 h

Standard Play (SP). Approx. 2 h

Long Play (LP) Approx. 4 h

Extended Play (EP). Approx. 6 h

Super Long Play (SLP). Approx. 8 h

Super Extended Play (SEP) Approx. 10 h

(DVD-R/-RW, DVD-RAM only)

Manual Mode (MN)

DVD-R/-RW/-RAM.. Approx. 1 h to 13 h

DVD + R / + RW Approx. 1 h to 8 h

DVD-R DL/DVD+R DL

Fine (XP). Approx. 1 h 51 m

Standard Play (SP) Approx. 3 h 35 m

Long Play (LP) Approx. 7 h 11 m

Extended Play (EP) Approx. 10 h 46 m

Super Long Play (SLP) Approx. 14 h 21 m

Super Extended Play (SEP) Approx. 17 h 57 m (DVD-R DL only)

Manual Mode (MN)

DVD-R DL .Approx. 1 h 51 m to 24 h

DVD+R DL . . . . . . . Approx. 1 h 51 m to 14 h 21 m

Timer

Programs. 1 month/32 programs

Clock.Quartz lock (24-hour digital display)

Tuner (analog)

Receivable channels

SECAM B/G

PALB/G/F FrequencyChannelPALT
FrequencyChannel
VHF (low)47 MHz to 89 MHzE2 to E4 X to Z44 MHz to 89 MHzA to C X to Z
VHF (high)104 MHz to 300 MHzE5 to E12 S1 to S20 M1 to M10 U1 to U10104 MHz to 300 MHzD to J 11, 13 S1 to S20
Hyper302 MHz to 470 MHzS21 to S41302 MHz to 470 MHzS21 to S41
UHF470 MHz to 862 MHzE21 to E69470 MHz to 862 MHzE21 to E69

SECAM D/K PAL D/K

SECAM LPAL D/K
FrequencyChannelFrequencyChannel
VHF (low)49 MHz to 65 MHzFB, FC1, FC49 MHz to 94 MHzR1 to R5
VHF (high)104 MHz to 300 MHzF1 to F6 B to Q104 MHz to 300 MHzR6 to R12 S1 to S20
Hyper300 MHz to 470 MHzS21 to S41302 MHz to 470 MHzS21 to S41
UHF470 MHz to 862 MHz21 to 69470 MHz to 862 MHzE21 to E69

STEREO

B/G-A2

T.NICAM

L-NICAM

B/G-NICAM

D/K-NICAM

Tuner (digital)

Receiving system DVB-T (2 K / 8 K COFDM)

Tuner VHF/UHF

.VHF band III (170 MHz to 230 MHz)

UHF band IV, V (470 MHz to 862 MHz)

Auto Channel Preset. 999 ch, Auto Preset,

Auto Label, Auto Sort

Audio . Stereo MPEG layer I/II

This product's digital tuner has been confirmed for use in the following countries: Belgium, France, Germany, Italy, Spain, Denmark, Finland, Netherlands, Sweden, UK.

Input/Output

Antenna

75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UCH in/out (analog)

75 Ω IEC 169-2 connector for VHF/UHF in/out (digital)

Video input .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),

Input 3 (rear)

Input level. 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)

Jacks.. .AV connector (Input 1),

RCA jack (Input 2, Input 3)

Video output.. .AV1,Output

Output level 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)

Jacks.. .AV connector (AV1),

RCA jack (Output)

S-Video input .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),

Input 3 (rear)

Y (luminance) - Input level 1 Vp-p (75 Ω)

C (colour) - Input level 300 mVp-p (75 Ω)

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. AV connector (Input 1),

Jacks.. .AV connector (Input 1)

RGB output.. .AV1

Output level 0.7 Vp-p (75 Ω)

Jacks.. AV connector (AV1)

Audio input. .AV2 (Input 1), Input 2 (front),

Input 3 (rear) L/R

During audio input .2V rms

(Input impedance: more than 22k

Jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. AV connector (Input 1),

RCA jacks (Input 2)

Audio output .AV1,Output

During audio output .2V rms

Output impedance: less than 1.5k

Jacks .AV connector (AV1),

RCA jacks (Output)

Control input. Mini jack

Digital audio output. Coaxial

G-LINK™ Mini jack

Common Interface. CA module

DV input 4 pin (front)

(i.LINK/IEEE 1394 standard)

USB ............ Type A (front), Type B (front)

HDMI. 19 pin

AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment)

AV connector input/output 21-pin connector

This connector provides the video and audio signals for connection to a compatible colour TV or monitor.

13579111315171921

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - AV Connectors (21-pin connector assignment) - 1

2468101214161820

PIN no. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AV1(RGB)-TV / AV2(INPUT 1/DECODER)
1 Audio 2/R out / Audio 2/R out
2 . - / Audio 2/R in
11 .Gout/Gin
3 Audio 1/L out / Audio 1/L out
6 ./Audio1/L in
15 .R or C out / R or C in
4 GND
17 GND
7 .Bout/Bin
19 Video out or Y out / Video out
20 .Video in or Y in
8 .Status
21 GND

Supplied accessories

Remote control 1

Dry cell batteries (AA/R6P) 2

Audio / Video cable (red/white/yellow) 1

G-LINK™ cable 1

RF antenna cable 2 (1.5 m and 30 cm)

Power cable. 1

Operating Instructions

Warranty card 1

Note: The specifications and design of this product are subject to change without notice, due to improvement.

This product includes FontAvenue® fonts licenced by NEC corporation. FontAvenue is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation.

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Supplied accessories - 1

PIONEER SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX) - Supplied accessories - 2

Published by Pioneer Corporation.

Copyright © 2006 Pioneer Corporation.

All rights reserved.

PIONEER CORPORATION

4-1, Meguro 1-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo 153-8654, Japan

PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.

P.O. BOX 1540, Long Beach, California 90810-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404

PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.

300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R OP2, Canada TEL: 1-877-283-5901

PIONEER EUROPE NV

Haven 1087, Keetberlaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium TEL: 03/570.05.11

PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.

253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-7555

PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.

178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia, TEL: (03) 9586-6300

PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO S.A. DE C.V.

Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico,D.F. 11000 TEL: 55-9178-4270

Table of contents Click a title to access it
Manual assistant
Powered by Anthropic
Waiting for your message
Product information

Brand : PIONEER

Model : SX-SW505HX (RCS-656HX)

Category : Subwoofer